fixup commit for tag 'oct-1'
This commit is contained in:
parent
7393f8923c
commit
dc2a339e09
21
.distr
21
.distr
|
@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
|
|||
Action
|
||||
Copyright
|
||||
NEW
|
||||
README
|
||||
TakeAction
|
||||
bin
|
||||
doc
|
||||
emtest
|
||||
etc
|
||||
fast
|
||||
fcc
|
||||
first
|
||||
h
|
||||
include
|
||||
modules
|
||||
lang
|
||||
lib
|
||||
mach
|
||||
man
|
||||
util
|
||||
Versions
|
276
Action
276
Action
|
@ -1,276 +0,0 @@
|
|||
name "System definition"
|
||||
dir first
|
||||
action ack_sys
|
||||
failure "You have to run the shell script first/first"
|
||||
fatal
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Manual pages"
|
||||
dir man
|
||||
end
|
||||
! name "EM definition"
|
||||
! dir etc
|
||||
! end
|
||||
name "EM definition library"
|
||||
dir util/data
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "C utilities"
|
||||
dir util/cmisc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Yacc parser generator"
|
||||
dir util/byacc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Flex lexical analyzer generator"
|
||||
dir util/flex
|
||||
action "make firstinstall && make clean"
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Include files for modules"
|
||||
dir modules/h
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Modules"
|
||||
dir modules/src
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "LL(1) Parser generator"
|
||||
dir util/LLgen
|
||||
action "make firstinstall && make clean"
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "C preprocessor"
|
||||
dir util/cpp
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Peephole optimizer libraries"
|
||||
dir modules/src/em_opt
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "ACK object utilities"
|
||||
dir util/amisc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Encode/Decode"
|
||||
dir util/misc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Shell files in bin"
|
||||
dir util/shf
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM assembler"
|
||||
dir util/ass
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM Peephole optimizer"
|
||||
dir util/opt
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM Global optimizer"
|
||||
dir util/ego
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "ACK archiver"
|
||||
dir util/arch
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Program 'ack'"
|
||||
dir util/ack
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Bootstrap for backend tables"
|
||||
dir util/cgg
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Bootstrap for newest form of backend tables"
|
||||
dir util/ncgg
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Bootstrap for code expanders"
|
||||
dir util/ceg
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "LED link editor"
|
||||
dir util/led
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "TOPGEN target optimizer generator"
|
||||
dir util/topgen
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "C frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/cem/cemcom
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "ANSI-C frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/cem/cemcom.ansi
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "ANSI-C preprocessor"
|
||||
dir lang/cem/cpp.ansi
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "ANSI-C header files"
|
||||
dir lang/cem/libcc.ansi
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "LINT C program checker"
|
||||
dir lang/cem/lint
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM definition lint-library"
|
||||
action "make lintlib"
|
||||
dir util/data
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Modules lint libraries"
|
||||
dir modules/src
|
||||
indir "Action.lint"
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Global optimizer lint libraries"
|
||||
dir util/ego/share
|
||||
action "make lintlib"
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Pascal frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/pc/comp
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Basic frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/basic/src
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Occam frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/occam/comp
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Modula-2 frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/m2/comp
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Modula-2 definition modules"
|
||||
dir lang/m2/libm2
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Modula-2 makefile generator"
|
||||
dir lang/m2/m2mm
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Fortran to C compiler"
|
||||
dir lang/fortran/comp
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM interpreter in C"
|
||||
dir util/int
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Symbolic debugger"
|
||||
dir util/grind
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Intel 8086 support"
|
||||
dir mach/i86
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Intel 80286 support for Xenix"
|
||||
dir mach/xenix3
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Intel 80386 support for Xenix 386 System V"
|
||||
dir mach/i386
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "MSC6500 support"
|
||||
dir mach/6500
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Motorola 6800 support"
|
||||
dir mach/6800
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Motorola 6805 support"
|
||||
dir mach/6805
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Motorola 6809 support"
|
||||
dir mach/6809
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Intel 8080 support"
|
||||
dir mach/i80
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "2-2 Interpreter support"
|
||||
dir mach/em22
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "2-4 Interpreter support"
|
||||
dir mach/em24
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "4-4 Interpreter support"
|
||||
dir mach/em44
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Motorola 68000 2-4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/m68k2
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Motorola 68000 4-4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/m68k4
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "NS16032 support"
|
||||
dir mach/ns
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "PDP 11 support"
|
||||
dir mach/pdp
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "PMDS support"
|
||||
dir mach/pmds
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "PMDS 4/4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/pmds4
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Signetics 2650 support"
|
||||
dir mach/s2650
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Vax 4-4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/vax4
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "M68020 System V/68 support"
|
||||
dir mach/m68020
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Sun 3 M68020 support"
|
||||
dir mach/sun3
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Sun 4 SPARC SunOs 4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/sparc
|
||||
system "sparc|sparc_solaris"
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Sun 4 SPARC Solaris support"
|
||||
dir mach/sparc_solaris
|
||||
system "sparc_solaris"
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Sun 2 M68000 support"
|
||||
dir mach/sun2
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Mantra M68000 System V.0 support"
|
||||
dir mach/mantra
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "PC Minix support"
|
||||
dir mach/minix
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Atari ST Minix support"
|
||||
dir mach/minixST
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Z80 support"
|
||||
dir mach/z80
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Zilog Z8000 support"
|
||||
dir mach/z8000
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Acorn Archimedes support"
|
||||
dir mach/arm
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Documentation"
|
||||
dir doc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Motorola 68000 interpreters"
|
||||
system "m68*|sun*"
|
||||
dir mach/mantra/int
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Fast compilers"
|
||||
system "m68020|sun3|i386|vax*"
|
||||
dir fast
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Fast cc-compatible C compiler"
|
||||
system "sun3|vax*"
|
||||
dir fcc
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
17
Copyright
17
Copyright
|
@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*
|
||||
* A M S T E R D A M C O M P I L E R K I T
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Copyright (c) 1987, 1991, 1993 by the Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam,
|
||||
* The Netherlands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Permission to use, sell, duplicate or disclose this software must be
|
||||
* obtained in writing. Requests for such permissions may be sent to
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Dr. Andrew S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
* Wiskundig Seminarium
|
||||
* Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
* De Boelelaan 1081a
|
||||
* 1081 HV Amsterdam
|
||||
* The Netherlands
|
||||
*
|
||||
*/
|
|
@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
|
|||
p=/proj/em/Work
|
||||
sh TakeAction 'make distr' $p/distr/Action
|
||||
sh TakeAction 'make distr' $p/distr/Action1
|
35
Makefile
35
Makefile
|
@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
|
|||
cmp: # compile everything and compare
|
||||
(cd etc ; make cmp )
|
||||
(cd util ; make cmp )
|
||||
(cd lang ; make cmp )
|
||||
(cd mach ; make cmp )
|
||||
|
||||
install: # compile everything to machine code
|
||||
(cd etc ; make install )
|
||||
(cd util ; make install )
|
||||
(cd lang/cem ; make install )
|
||||
(cd mach ; make install )
|
||||
(cd lang/pc ; make install )
|
||||
|
||||
clean: # remove all non-sources, except boot-files
|
||||
(cd doc ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd man ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd h ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd etc ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd util ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd lang ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd mach ; make clean )
|
||||
|
||||
opr: # print all sources
|
||||
make pr | opr
|
||||
|
||||
pr: # print all sources
|
||||
@( pr Makefile ; \
|
||||
(cd doc ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd man ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd h ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd etc ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd lang ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd util ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd mach ; make pr ) \
|
||||
)
|
34
NEW
34
NEW
|
@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
|
|||
This is ACK distribution 5.2.
|
||||
|
||||
The only addition with respect to the 5th ACK distribution is the support
|
||||
for Solaris 2 on SPARCs. It also contains many bug fixes.
|
||||
|
||||
Notes for the 5th ACK distribution:
|
||||
|
||||
It is not wise to mix files created by the previous version of the Kit
|
||||
with files belonging to this version, although that might sometimes work.
|
||||
Many problems with the previous distribution have been fixed.
|
||||
The major additions are:
|
||||
|
||||
- an ANSI C compiler
|
||||
- a LINT C program checker, both non-ansi and ansi
|
||||
- an Intel 80386 back-end
|
||||
- a SPARC code expander
|
||||
- a source level debugger for Pascal, Modula-2, C, and ANSI C
|
||||
- an Acorn Archimedes back-end
|
||||
- code-expanders for VAX, Intel 80386 and Motorola M68020 processors,
|
||||
and very fast Pascal, Modula-2, ANSI C, and C compilers constructed
|
||||
using these code expanders
|
||||
- a cc-compatible very fast C compiler for SUN-3 and VAX.
|
||||
|
||||
Also added, but not part of the Kit proper are
|
||||
- flex: a lexical analyzer generator
|
||||
- byacc: yacc-clone by UCB
|
||||
- f2c: a Fortran to C compiler by AT&T.
|
||||
|
||||
See the ACK installation manual for their copyright notices.
|
||||
|
||||
--
|
||||
Ceriel Jacobs, Dept. of Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije Universiteit,
|
||||
De Boelelaan 1081a, 1081 HV Amsterdam, The Netherlands
|
||||
Email: ceriel@cs.vu.nl Fax: +31 20 6427705
|
2
README
2
README
|
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
|
|||
Before starting installation you should read
|
||||
the file doc/install.pr
|
144
TakeAction
144
TakeAction
|
@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
|
|||
case $# in
|
||||
0) PAR='make install && make clean' ; CMD=Action ;;
|
||||
1) PAR="$1" ; CMD=Action ;;
|
||||
2) PAR="$1" ; CMD="$2" ;;
|
||||
*) echo Syntax: "$0" [command [file]] ; exit 1 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
if test -r "$CMD"
|
||||
then :
|
||||
else
|
||||
case "$CMD" in
|
||||
Action) echo No Action file present ;;
|
||||
*) echo No Action file "($CMD)" present ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
fi
|
||||
case $0 in
|
||||
/*) THISFILE=$0
|
||||
;;
|
||||
*) if [ -f $0 ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
THISFILE=`pwd`/$0
|
||||
else
|
||||
THISFILE=$0
|
||||
fi
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
SYS=
|
||||
RETC=0
|
||||
{ while read LINE
|
||||
do
|
||||
eval set $LINE
|
||||
case x"$1" in
|
||||
x!*) ;;
|
||||
xname) SYS="$2"
|
||||
ACTION='$PAR'
|
||||
DIR=.
|
||||
FM=no
|
||||
FAIL='Failed for $SYS, see $DIR/Out'
|
||||
SUCC='$SYS -- done'
|
||||
ATYPE=
|
||||
FATAL=no
|
||||
DOIT=yes
|
||||
;;
|
||||
xfatal) FATAL=yes ;;
|
||||
xaction|xindir) case x$ATYPE in
|
||||
x) ACTION=$2 ; ATYPE=$1
|
||||
case $ATYPE$FM in
|
||||
indirno) FAIL='Failed for $SYS' ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
;;
|
||||
*) echo Already specified an $ATYPE for this name
|
||||
RETC=65 ;;
|
||||
esac ;;
|
||||
xfailure) FM=yes
|
||||
FAIL="$2" ;;
|
||||
xsuccess) SUCC="$2" ;;
|
||||
xdir) DIR="$2" ;;
|
||||
xsystem) PAT="$2"
|
||||
oIFS=$IFS
|
||||
IFS="|"
|
||||
eval set $2
|
||||
case x`ack_sys` in
|
||||
x$1|x$2|x$3|x$4|x$5|x$6|x$7) ;;
|
||||
*) echo "Sorry, $SYS can only be made on $PAT systems"
|
||||
DOIT=no
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
IFS=$oIFS
|
||||
;;
|
||||
xend) case $DOIT in
|
||||
no) continue ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
case x$SYS in
|
||||
x) echo Missing name line; RETC=65 ;;
|
||||
*) if test -d $DIR
|
||||
then (
|
||||
cd $DIR
|
||||
X=
|
||||
case $ATYPE in
|
||||
indir)
|
||||
if $THISFILE "$PAR" $ACTION
|
||||
then eval echo $SUCC
|
||||
else RETC=2 ; eval echo $FAIL
|
||||
fi ;;
|
||||
*)
|
||||
case "$ACTION" in
|
||||
'$PAR')
|
||||
ACTION="$PAR"
|
||||
;;
|
||||
*) ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
if [ -f No$CMD ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
x=`cat No$CMD`
|
||||
if [ "$ACTION" = "$x" ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
ACTION='echo "No actions performed, No$CMD file present"'
|
||||
SUCC='$SYS -- skipped'
|
||||
fi
|
||||
fi
|
||||
if eval "{ $ACTION ; } >Out 2>&1 </dev/null"
|
||||
then eval echo $SUCC
|
||||
if [ "$SUCC" = '$SYS -- skipped' ]
|
||||
then :
|
||||
else echo "$ACTION" > No$CMD 2>/dev/null
|
||||
fi
|
||||
else RETC=1 ; X=: ; eval echo $FAIL
|
||||
fi
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
(echo ------- `pwd`
|
||||
cat Out
|
||||
$X rm -f Out
|
||||
) 2>/dev/null 1>&- 1>&3
|
||||
exit $RETC
|
||||
)
|
||||
case $? in
|
||||
0) ;;
|
||||
*) case $RETC in
|
||||
0) RETC=$? ;;
|
||||
esac ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo Directory $DIR for $SYS is inaccessible
|
||||
RETC=66
|
||||
fi ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
case $FATAL$RETC in
|
||||
yes0) ;;
|
||||
yes*) echo Fatal error, installation stopped.
|
||||
exit $RETC ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
SYS=
|
||||
;;
|
||||
*) echo Unknown keyword "$1"
|
||||
RETC=67 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
done
|
||||
exit $RETC
|
||||
} <$CMD
|
||||
RETX=$?
|
||||
case $RETX in
|
||||
0) exit $RETC ;;
|
||||
*) exit $RETX ;;
|
||||
esac
|
|
@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
|
|||
cc-and-mkdep.ack
|
||||
cc-and-mkdep.all
|
||||
cc-and-mkdep.sun
|
||||
do_deps
|
||||
do_resolve
|
||||
lint-lib.ack
|
||||
lint-lib.unix
|
||||
mk_manpage
|
||||
rm_deps
|
|
@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: '$Id$'
|
||||
|
||||
: Compile and make dependencies. First argument is the file on which the
|
||||
: dependencies must be produced. This version is for ACK.
|
||||
n=$1
|
||||
shift
|
||||
exec $CC -Rcem-A$n -Rcem-m $*
|
|
@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: '$Id$'
|
||||
|
||||
: Compile and make dependencies. First argument is the file on which the
|
||||
: dependencies must be produced. This version is a generic one that should
|
||||
: work for all Unix systems.
|
||||
n=$1
|
||||
shift
|
||||
cpp_args=
|
||||
for i in $*
|
||||
do
|
||||
case $i in
|
||||
-I*|-D*|-U*) cpp_args="$cpp_args $i"
|
||||
;;
|
||||
-*) ;;
|
||||
*) cpp_args="$cpp_args $i"
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
done
|
||||
$UTIL_HOME/lib.bin/cpp -d -m $cpp_args > $n
|
||||
exec $CC $*
|
|
@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: '$Id$'
|
||||
|
||||
: Compile and make dependencies. First argument is the file on which the
|
||||
: dependencies must be produced. This version is for the SUN cc.
|
||||
n=$1
|
||||
shift
|
||||
exec $CC -Qpath $UTIL_HOME/lib.bin -Qoption cpp -d$n -Qoption cpp -m $*
|
18
bin/do_deps
18
bin/do_deps
|
@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: '$Id$'
|
||||
|
||||
: Produce dependencies for all argument files
|
||||
|
||||
for i in $*
|
||||
do
|
||||
n=`basename $i .c`
|
||||
if [ -f $n.dep ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
:
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo $n.'$(SUF): '$i > $n.dep
|
||||
echo " head -5 $n.dep > $n.dp1" >> $n.dep
|
||||
echo ' CC="$(CC)" UTIL_HOME="$(UTIL_HOME)" $(CC_AND_MKDEP) '$n.dp2 '$(CFLAGS)' -c $i >> $n.dep
|
||||
echo " cat $n.dp1 $n.dp2 > $n.dep" >> $n.dep
|
||||
echo " rm -f $n.dp1 $n.dp2" >> $n.dep
|
||||
fi
|
||||
done
|
|
@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: '$Id$'
|
||||
|
||||
: Resolve name clashes in the files on the argument list. If these
|
||||
: files reside in another directory, a copy is made in the current
|
||||
: directory. If not, it is overwritten. Never do this in a source
|
||||
: directory! A list of the new files is produced on standard output.
|
||||
|
||||
UTIL_BIN=$UTIL_HOME/bin
|
||||
|
||||
trap "rm -f tmp$$ a.out nmclash.* longnames clashes" 0 1 2 3 15
|
||||
|
||||
: first find out if we have to resolve problems with identifier significance.
|
||||
|
||||
cat > nmclash.c <<'EOF'
|
||||
/* Accepted if many characters of long names are significant */
|
||||
abcdefghijklmnopr() { }
|
||||
abcdefghijklmnopq() { }
|
||||
main() { }
|
||||
EOF
|
||||
if $CC nmclash.c
|
||||
then : no identifier significance problem
|
||||
for i in $*
|
||||
do
|
||||
echo $i
|
||||
done
|
||||
else
|
||||
$UTIL_BIN/prid -l7 $* > longnames
|
||||
|
||||
: remove code generating routines from the clashes list.
|
||||
: code generating routine names start with C_.
|
||||
: also remove names starting with flt_.
|
||||
|
||||
sed '/^C_/d' < longnames | sed '/^flt_/d' > tmp$$
|
||||
$UTIL_BIN/cclash -c -l7 tmp$$ > clashes
|
||||
for i in $*
|
||||
do
|
||||
$UTIL_BIN/cid -Fclashes < $i > tmp$$
|
||||
n=`basename $i .xxx`
|
||||
if cmp -s $n tmp$$
|
||||
then
|
||||
rm -f tmp$$
|
||||
else
|
||||
mv tmp$$ $n
|
||||
fi
|
||||
echo $n
|
||||
done
|
||||
fi
|
|
@ -1 +0,0 @@
|
|||
exec /usr/em/doc/em/int/em /usr/em/doc/em/int/tables ${1-e.out} core
|
|
@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: '$Id$'
|
||||
|
||||
: Create a lint library file. The name of the library file is constructed
|
||||
: from the first argument. The second argument indicates the directory where
|
||||
: the result is to be placed. This version is for ACK lint.
|
||||
|
||||
n=$1
|
||||
shift
|
||||
d=$1
|
||||
shift
|
||||
lint -L$n $*
|
||||
mv $n.llb $d
|
|
@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: '$Id$'
|
||||
|
||||
: Create a lint library file. The name of the library file is constructed
|
||||
: from the first argument. The second argument indicates the directory where
|
||||
: the result is to be placed. This version is for Unix lint.
|
||||
|
||||
n=$1
|
||||
shift
|
||||
d=$1
|
||||
shift
|
||||
/usr/bin/lint -C$n $*
|
||||
mv llib-l$n.ln $d
|
|
@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
|
|||
num=`expr $1 : '.*\.\([1-8]\)'`
|
||||
|
||||
if [ -d $2/man ] ; then : ; else mkdir $2/man ; fi
|
||||
if [ -f $2/man/head ] ; then : ; else cat > $2/man/head <<'EOF'
|
||||
.rn TH yy
|
||||
.de TH
|
||||
.di zz
|
||||
.yy "\\$1" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4"
|
||||
.ds ]W 5th ACK distribution
|
||||
.ds ]D Amsterdam Compiler Kit
|
||||
.ds ]L "\\$3
|
||||
.di
|
||||
.rm zz
|
||||
..
|
||||
EOF
|
||||
fi
|
||||
if [ -d $2/man/man$num ] ; then : ; else mkdir $2/man/man$num ; fi
|
||||
cat $2/man/head $1 > $2/man/man$num/`expr //$1 : '.*/\([^/]*\)'`
|
|
@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: $Id$
|
||||
|
||||
: remove dependencies from a makefile, write result on standard output.
|
||||
: we cannot do this directly in a makefile because some make versions
|
||||
: have # start a comment, always.
|
||||
|
||||
sed -e '/^#DEPENDENCIES/,$d' $1
|
||||
echo '#DEPENDENCIES'
|
|
@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
|
|||
name "EM tables"
|
||||
dir etc
|
||||
end
|
|
@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
|
|||
name "m68k2/cg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/m68k2/cg
|
||||
action "make EMHOME=/proj/em/Work distr"
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "vax4/cg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/vax4/cg
|
||||
action "make EMHOME=/proj/em/Work distr"
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "m68020/ncg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/m68020/ncg
|
||||
action "make EMHOME=/proj/em/Work distr"
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "m68k4/cg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/m68k4/cg
|
||||
action "make EMHOME=/proj/em/Work distr"
|
||||
end
|
|
@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
|
|||
++ ./doc/proto.make made
|
||||
++ ./doc/int/.distr made
|
||||
++ ./h/em_mnem.h not present
|
||||
++ ./h/em_pseu.h not present
|
||||
++ ./h/em_spec.h not present
|
||||
++ ./lang/cem/cemcom.ansi/Version.c made
|
||||
++ ./lang/cem/libcc.ansi/stdlib/malloc.c made
|
||||
++ ./lang/cem/cemcom/Version.c made
|
||||
++ ./lang/pc/comp/Version.c made
|
||||
++ ./lang/m2/comp/Version.c made
|
||||
++ ./lang/m2/m2mm/Version.c made
|
||||
++ ./mach/sparc/ce/EM_table made
|
||||
++ ./mach/sparc_solaris/libem/LIST made
|
||||
++ ./util/LLgen/src/LLgen.c.dist made
|
||||
++ ./util/cpp/Version.c made
|
||||
++ ./util/data/em_flag.c not present
|
||||
++ ./util/data/em_mnem.c not present
|
||||
++ ./util/data/em_pseu.c not present
|
||||
++ ./util/ego/share/pop_push.h made
|
||||
++ ./util/grind/ops.c made
|
65
distr/How_To
65
distr/How_To
|
@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
|
|||
How to make a fresh distribution:
|
||||
For a distribution you need ".distr" files and RCS files.
|
||||
The EM home directory contains a file called ".distr". It contains
|
||||
the names of all the files and directories you want to have in the distribution.
|
||||
The directories should contain .distr files, the other files should
|
||||
be placed under CVS.
|
||||
There are files that derive from other files and yet should be placed
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
These files should not be placed under RCS or CVS.
|
||||
The file "Exceptions" in this directory contains the current list of
|
||||
these files.
|
||||
|
||||
When all this is correct, use the shell script mktree the extract
|
||||
the distribution from the EM tree.
|
||||
sh mktree destination_tree repository_tree > destination_tree/Versions 2>f.attf
|
||||
Make sure that the destination tree exists and is empty!
|
||||
Failing to do that will almost certainly result in a welter of
|
||||
error messages.
|
||||
The file f.attf contains mktree error messages and should be compared
|
||||
to Exceptions.
|
||||
The actions of mktree are quite complicated. It starts in the current
|
||||
directory creating a version in the destination directory.
|
||||
Then it reads the .distr file.
|
||||
For each file mentioned there it performes certain actions:
|
||||
1- Directory Change to that directory and call yourself recursively.
|
||||
2- File
|
||||
a- Does a file LIST exist in this directory AND
|
||||
is the first line of LIST equal to the name of the
|
||||
destination file? If so, try to extract all the files
|
||||
named in the rest of the LIST file and call the program
|
||||
arch to create a library "arch cDr `cat LIST`".
|
||||
In this manner libraries can be distributed whose members
|
||||
have their own RCS file.
|
||||
else
|
||||
b- Try to run 'make distr'
|
||||
else
|
||||
c- Try to run 'make <filename>'
|
||||
else
|
||||
d- give message that says "not present" (or some such).
|
||||
|
||||
Now, the tree contains all the files in the distribution, but it also contains
|
||||
files that should not be in the distribution, especially the files created
|
||||
by CVS.
|
||||
That is why we now give the command:
|
||||
dtar cdf distr5 .
|
||||
The file distr5 is the one you should put on tape!
|
||||
But,.... before doing that: Try it out!
|
||||
Repeat the process described in the installation manual.
|
||||
Only if that succeeds you are sure that you included the files needed.
|
||||
Good Luck,
|
||||
Ed Keizer, 85/4/15.
|
||||
|
||||
Updated for 3rd distribution by Ceriel Jacobs, 87/3/11.
|
||||
And again,
|
||||
Good Luck!
|
||||
|
||||
Updated for 4th distribution by Ceriel Jacobs, 88/4/08.
|
||||
And again,
|
||||
Good Luck!
|
||||
Updated for 5th distribution by Ceriel Jacobs, 91/19/12.
|
||||
And again,
|
||||
Good Luck!
|
||||
Updated for 1st upgrade to 5th distribution by Ceriel Jacobs, 91/12/11.
|
||||
And again,
|
||||
Good Luck!
|
30
distr/dwalk
30
distr/dwalk
|
@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: ${CDIR=.}
|
||||
if [ $# = 1 ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
${DD-:} $CDIR $1
|
||||
else
|
||||
${DD-:} $CDIR
|
||||
fi
|
||||
${DF-:} $CDIR .distr
|
||||
if test ! -r $DESTDIR/$CDIR/.distr
|
||||
then
|
||||
echo ++ no .distr in $CDIR 1>&2
|
||||
exit 0
|
||||
fi
|
||||
for i in `cat $DESTDIR/$CDIR/.distr`
|
||||
do
|
||||
if test -d $i
|
||||
then
|
||||
( if cd $i
|
||||
then
|
||||
CDIR=$CDIR/$i
|
||||
export CDIR
|
||||
exec $DDIR/dwalk $*
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo ++ Could not access $CDIR/$i 1>&2
|
||||
fi
|
||||
)
|
||||
else
|
||||
${DF-:} $CDIR $i
|
||||
fi
|
||||
done
|
|
@ -1 +0,0 @@
|
|||
echo $1
|
26
distr/f.attf
26
distr/f.attf
|
@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
|
|||
-- ./doc/install.pr no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./h/em_mnem.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./h/em_pseu.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./h/em_spec.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem22.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem24.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem44.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/LLgen/incl no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/LLgen/rec no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68k2/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68k2/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68020/ncg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68020/ncg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/parser no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/LLgen.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/tokens.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_flag.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_mnem.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_pseu.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/ego/share/pop_push.h no RCS file
|
|
@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
|
|||
case $# in
|
||||
0) DESTDIR=. ;;
|
||||
1) DESTDIR=$1 ;;
|
||||
*) echo $0 [directory] ; exit 1 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
DD=`pwd`/listall.d
|
||||
DW=`pwd`/dwalk
|
||||
export DD DESTDIR
|
||||
cd $DESTDIR
|
||||
$DW
|
|
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
|
|||
echo "<$1>"
|
||||
ls -bCdx `cat .distr`
|
|
@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
|
|||
case $# in
|
||||
0) DIR=. ;;
|
||||
1) DIR=$1 ;;
|
||||
*) echo $0 [directory] ; exit 1 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
DD=`pwd`/echod
|
||||
DW=`pwd`/dwalk
|
||||
export DD
|
||||
cd $DIR
|
||||
$DW
|
|
@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
|
|||
: Utility to make a tree of symbolic links to source tree.
|
||||
: Mount the source tree read-only, use this script, and then try installation.
|
||||
case $# in
|
||||
2) ;;
|
||||
*) echo "Usage: $0 <source-tree> <symlink-tree>" 1>&2
|
||||
exit 1
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
if [ -f $1/.distr ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
for i in `cat $1/.distr`
|
||||
do
|
||||
if [ -d $1/$i ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
if mkdir $2/$i && $0 $1/$i $2/$i
|
||||
then
|
||||
:
|
||||
else
|
||||
exit 2
|
||||
fi
|
||||
else
|
||||
if [ -f $1/$i ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
if ln -s $1/$i $2/$i
|
||||
then
|
||||
:
|
||||
else
|
||||
exit 3
|
||||
fi
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo "Missing file $1/$i" 1>&2
|
||||
exit 4
|
||||
fi
|
||||
fi
|
||||
done
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo "No .distr file in $1" 1>&2
|
||||
exit 5
|
||||
fi
|
|
@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
|
|||
set -e
|
||||
for i in `tail +2 $DESTDIR/$1/LIST`
|
||||
do
|
||||
${DF-false} $1 $i
|
||||
done
|
||||
cd $DESTDIR/$1
|
||||
arch cDr `cat LIST`
|
||||
: I do not remove the files constituating the library, because
|
||||
: they might be present in .distr
|
27
distr/mkd
27
distr/mkd
|
@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
|
|||
case $1 in
|
||||
.) ;;
|
||||
*) mkdir $DESTDIR/$1
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
p=$REPDIR/$1
|
||||
dir=$1
|
||||
if [ $# = 2 ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
if [ -f $2 ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
set `fgrep "$dir " $2`
|
||||
fi
|
||||
fi
|
||||
cd $DESTDIR/$dir
|
||||
if [ $# = 2 ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
RV $p $2 > /dev/null 2>&1
|
||||
echo "$dir $2"
|
||||
else
|
||||
if `CV $p > /dev/null 2>&1`
|
||||
then
|
||||
echo "$dir `RC -i`"
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo "-- $dir CV failed for some reason" 1>&2
|
||||
fi
|
||||
fi
|
17
distr/mkf
17
distr/mkf
|
@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
|
|||
if [ -f $DESTDIR/$1/$2 ]
|
||||
then
|
||||
:
|
||||
elif grep LIST $DESTDIR/$1/.distr >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
|
||||
(test "$2" = "`head -1 $DESTDIR/$1/LIST`") >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
|
||||
${DA-false} "$1" "$2"
|
||||
then
|
||||
: Fetched library contents one by one and put them together
|
||||
elif ( cd $DESTDIR/$1 ; make distr ) > /dev/null 2>&1
|
||||
then
|
||||
echo ++ $1/$2 made 1>&2
|
||||
elif ( cd $DESTDIR/$1 ; make $2 ) > /dev/null 2>&1
|
||||
then
|
||||
echo ++ $1/$2 made 1>&2
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo ++ $1/$2 not present 1>&2
|
||||
fi
|
28
distr/mktree
28
distr/mktree
|
@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
|
|||
case $# in
|
||||
2|3) ;;
|
||||
*) echo Usage: $0 directory repdir [ SVrecord ] 1>&2 ; exit 1 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
case $0 in
|
||||
/*) DDIR=`dirname $0`
|
||||
;;
|
||||
*) DDIR=`pwd`/`dirname $0`
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
case $1 in
|
||||
/*) DESTDIR=$1 ;;
|
||||
*) DESTDIR=`pwd`/$1 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
case $2 in
|
||||
/*) REPDIR=$2 ;;
|
||||
*) REPDIR=`pwd`/$2 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
cd $REPDIR
|
||||
DD=$DDIR/mkd
|
||||
DF=$DDIR/mkf
|
||||
DA=$DDIR/mka
|
||||
export DDIR DESTDIR DD DF DA REPDIR
|
||||
$DDIR/dwalk $3
|
||||
|
||||
cd $DESTDIR
|
||||
find . -type d -print | xargs chmod "uog+rx"
|
||||
chmod -R "og-w,u+w,uog+r" .
|
|
@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
|
|||
REV=
|
||||
FILE=
|
||||
while :
|
||||
do
|
||||
case $# in
|
||||
0) break ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
ARG="$1"
|
||||
shift
|
||||
case "$ARG" in
|
||||
-r*) REV=`echo "$ARG"| sed s/-r//` ;;
|
||||
-*) FLAGS="$FLAGS $ARG" ;;
|
||||
*) case x$FILE in
|
||||
x) FILE="$ARG" ;;
|
||||
*) echo todistr can only be done on one file at the time
|
||||
exit 1 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
esac
|
||||
done
|
||||
case x$REV in
|
||||
x) REV=`rlog -h "$FILE"|sed -n -e '/head/s/^head:[ ]*//p'` ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
case x$REV in
|
||||
x) exit 2 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
rcs -ndistr4:$REV $FLAGS $FILE
|
32
doc/.distr
32
doc/.distr
|
@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
|
|||
READ_ME
|
||||
Makefile
|
||||
proto.make
|
||||
ack.doc
|
||||
basic.doc
|
||||
cg.doc
|
||||
crefman.doc
|
||||
ansi_C.doc
|
||||
em
|
||||
install.doc
|
||||
install.pr
|
||||
ncg.doc
|
||||
pcref.doc
|
||||
peep.doc
|
||||
regadd.doc
|
||||
toolkit.doc
|
||||
v7bugs.doc
|
||||
val.doc
|
||||
LLgen
|
||||
6500.doc
|
||||
i80.doc
|
||||
z80.doc
|
||||
m68020.doc
|
||||
m2ref.doc
|
||||
nopt.doc
|
||||
top
|
||||
ego
|
||||
occam
|
||||
int
|
||||
ceg
|
||||
sparc
|
||||
lint
|
1893
doc/6500.doc
1893
doc/6500.doc
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load diff
|
@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
|
|||
LLgen.n
|
||||
LLgen.refs
|
||||
proto.make
|
1072
doc/LLgen/LLgen.n
1072
doc/LLgen/LLgen.n
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load diff
|
@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
|
|||
%T An ALL(1) Compiler Generator
|
||||
%A D. R. Milton
|
||||
%A L. W. Kirchhoff
|
||||
%A B. R. Rowland
|
||||
%B Proc. of the SIGPLAN '79 Symposium on Compiler Construction
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 152-157
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
|
||||
%T Lex - A Lexical Analyser Generator
|
||||
%A M. E. Lesk
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%D October 1975
|
||||
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%R Comp. Sci. Tech. Rep. No. 39
|
||||
|
||||
%T Yacc: Yet Another Compiler Compiler
|
||||
%A S. C. Johnson
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%D 1975
|
||||
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%R Comp. Sci. Tech. Rep. No. 32
|
||||
|
||||
%T The C Programming Language
|
||||
%A B. W. Kernighan
|
||||
%A D. M. Ritchie
|
||||
%I Prentice-Hall, Inc.
|
||||
%C Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey
|
||||
%D 1978
|
||||
|
||||
%A M. Griffiths
|
||||
%T LL(1) Grammars and Analysers
|
||||
%E F. L. Bauer and J. Eickel
|
||||
%B Compiler Construction, An Advanced Course
|
||||
%I Springer-Verlag
|
||||
%C New York, N.Y.
|
||||
%D 1974
|
||||
|
||||
%T Make - A Program for Maintaining Computer Programs
|
||||
%A S. I. Feldman
|
||||
%J Software - Practice and Experience
|
||||
%V 10
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 255-265
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T Methods for the Automatic Construction of Error Correcting Parsers
|
||||
%A J. R\*:ohrich
|
||||
%J Acta Informatica
|
||||
%V 13
|
||||
%P 115-139
|
||||
%D 1980
|
|
@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
|
|||
# $Id$
|
||||
|
||||
EQN=eqn
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
TARGET=-Tlp
|
||||
|
||||
../LLgen.doc: LLgen.n LLgen.refs
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -p LLgen.refs LLgen.n | $(EQN) $(TARGET) | $(TBL) > $@
|
|
@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
|
|||
# $Id$
|
||||
|
||||
#PARAMS do not remove this line!
|
||||
|
||||
SRC_DIR = $(SRC_HOME)/doc/LLgen
|
||||
|
||||
EQN=eqn
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
|
||||
$(TARGET_HOME)/doc/LLgen.doc: $(SRC_DIR)/LLgen.n $(SRC_DIR)/LLgen.refs
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -p $(SRC_DIR)/LLgen.refs $(SRC_DIR)/LLgen.n | $(EQN) | $(TBL) > $@
|
81
doc/Makefile
81
doc/Makefile
|
@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
|
|||
# $Id$
|
||||
|
||||
# This Makefile is not supposed to be used in the doc source directory.
|
||||
# Instead, it is supposed to be copied to the target doc directory.
|
||||
|
||||
SUF=dit
|
||||
PRINT=dis
|
||||
NROFF=troff
|
||||
MS=-ms
|
||||
OPR=dip
|
||||
|
||||
RESFILES= \
|
||||
toolkit.$(SUF) install.$(SUF) em.$(SUF) ack.$(SUF) v7bugs.$(SUF) \
|
||||
peep.$(SUF) cg.$(SUF) ncg.$(SUF) regadd.$(SUF) LLgen.$(SUF) \
|
||||
basic.$(SUF) crefman.$(SUF) pcref.$(SUF) val.$(SUF) ansi_C.$(SUF) \
|
||||
6500.$(SUF) i80.$(SUF) z80.$(SUF) top.$(SUF) ego.$(SUF) \
|
||||
m68020.$(SUF) occam.$(SUF) m2ref.$(SUF) ceg.$(SUF) nopt.$(SUF) \
|
||||
sparc.$(SUF) int.$(SUF) lint.$(SUF)
|
||||
|
||||
.SUFFIXES: .doc .$(SUF) .lpr .out
|
||||
|
||||
.doc.$(SUF):
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $< > $@
|
||||
|
||||
# directly to the printer:
|
||||
.doc.lpr:
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $< | $(OPR)
|
||||
|
||||
# to standard output
|
||||
.doc.out:
|
||||
@$(NROFF) $(MS) $<
|
||||
|
||||
# Exceptions, to be run without -ms
|
||||
|
||||
v7bugs.$(SUF): v7bugs.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) v7bugs.doc >$@
|
||||
|
||||
v7bugs.lpr: v7bugs.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) v7bugs.doc | $(OPR)
|
||||
|
||||
v7bugs.out: v7bugs.doc
|
||||
@$(NROFF) v7bugs.doc
|
||||
|
||||
pcref.$(SUF): pcref.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) pcref.doc >$@
|
||||
|
||||
pcref.lpr: pcref.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) pcref.doc | $(OPR)
|
||||
|
||||
pcref.out: pcref.doc
|
||||
@$(NROFF) pcref.doc
|
||||
|
||||
val.$(SUF): val.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) val.doc >$@
|
||||
|
||||
val.lpr: val.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) val.doc | $(OPR)
|
||||
|
||||
val.out: val.doc
|
||||
@$(NROFF) val.doc
|
||||
|
||||
pr:
|
||||
@make "SUF="$(SUF) "NROFF="$(NROFF) "MS="$(MS) \
|
||||
$(RESFILES) >make.pr.out 2>&1
|
||||
@$(PRINT) $(RESFILES)
|
||||
|
||||
# The 'opr' entry creates a lot of paper ... but the user must be able
|
||||
# to write the doc directory. I hope that this limits the users of
|
||||
# this entry to persons that know what they are doing.
|
||||
opr:
|
||||
@make "SUF="$(SUF) "NROFF="$(NROFF) "MS="$(MS) $(RESFILES)
|
||||
$(OPR) $(RESFILES)
|
||||
|
||||
clean:
|
||||
-rm -f $(RESFILES)
|
||||
|
||||
# The distr entry is only used when making a distribution tree.
|
||||
# It makes a version of the installation manual, suitable for a simple
|
||||
# line printer.
|
||||
distr: install.doc
|
||||
tbl install.doc | nroff -Tlpr $(MS) >install.pr
|
|
@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
|
|||
Some of these documents use a font called CW.
|
||||
If this font is not available, reference to it can be changed with
|
||||
a sed-script like
|
||||
s/\.ft CW/.ft yourfont/
|
||||
s/\\f(CW/\\fyourfont/g
|
||||
s/^.fp\(.*\)CW$/.fp\1yourfont/
|
||||
However, the font must be a constant-width font for the documents to look
|
||||
reasonable.
|
444
doc/ack.doc
444
doc/ack.doc
|
@ -1,444 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.\" $Id$
|
||||
.nr PD 1v
|
||||
.tr ~
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
Ack Description File
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Reference Manual
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
Ed Keizer
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Vakgroep Informatica
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Amsterdam
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The program \fIack\fP(I) internally maintains a table of
|
||||
possible transformations and a table of string variables.
|
||||
The transformation table contains one entry for each possible
|
||||
transformation of a file.
|
||||
Which transformations are used depends on the suffix of the
|
||||
source file.
|
||||
Each transformation table entry tells which input suffixes are
|
||||
allowed and what suffix/name the output file has.
|
||||
When the output file does not already satisfy the request of the
|
||||
user (indicated with the flag \fB\-c.suffix\fP), the table is scanned
|
||||
starting with the next transformation in the table for another
|
||||
transformation that has as input suffix the output suffix of
|
||||
the previous transformation.
|
||||
A few special transformations are recognized, among them is the
|
||||
combiner, which is
|
||||
a program combining several files into one.
|
||||
When no stop suffix was specified (flag \fB\-c.suffix\fP) \fIack\fP
|
||||
stops after executing the combiner with as arguments the \-
|
||||
possibly transformed \- input files and libraries.
|
||||
\fIAck\fP will only perform the transformations in the order in
|
||||
which they are presented in the table.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The string variables are used while creating the argument list
|
||||
and program call name for
|
||||
a particular transformation.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Which descriptions are used
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
\fIAck\fP always uses two description files: one to define the
|
||||
front-end transformations and one for the machine dependent
|
||||
back-end transformations.
|
||||
Each description has a name.
|
||||
First the way of determining
|
||||
the name of the descriptions needed is described.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When the shell environment variable ACKFE is set \fIack\fP uses
|
||||
that to determine the front-end table name, otherwise it uses
|
||||
\fBfe\fP.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The way the backend table name is determined is more
|
||||
convoluted.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
First, when the last filename in the program call name is not
|
||||
one of \fIack\fP or the front-end call-names,
|
||||
this filename is used as the backend description name.
|
||||
Second, when the \fB\-m\fP is present the \fB\-m\fP is chopped of this
|
||||
flag and the rest is used as the backend description name.
|
||||
Third, when both failed the shell environment variable ACKM is
|
||||
used.
|
||||
Last, when also ACKM was not present the default backend is
|
||||
used, determined by the definition of ACKM in h/local.h.
|
||||
The presence and value of the definition of ACKM is
|
||||
determined at compile time of \fIack\fP.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Now, we have the names, but that is only the first step.
|
||||
\fIAck\fP stores a few descriptions at compile time.
|
||||
This descriptions are simply files read in at compile time.
|
||||
At the moment of writing this document, the descriptions
|
||||
included are: pdp, fe, i86, m68k2, vax2 and int.
|
||||
The name of a description is first searched for internally,
|
||||
then in lib/descr/\fIname\fP, then in
|
||||
lib/\fIname\fP/descr, and finally in the current
|
||||
directory of the user.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Using the description file
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Before starting on a narrative of the description file,
|
||||
the introduction of a few terms is necessary.
|
||||
All these terms are used to describe the scanning of zero
|
||||
terminated strings, thereby producing another string or
|
||||
sequence of strings.
|
||||
.IP Backslashing 5
|
||||
.br
|
||||
All characters preceded by \e are modified to prevent
|
||||
recognition at further scanning.
|
||||
This modification is undone before a string is passed to the
|
||||
outside world as argument or message.
|
||||
When reading the description files the
|
||||
sequences \e\e, \e# and \e<newline> have a special meaning.
|
||||
\e\e translates to a single \e, \e# translates to a single #
|
||||
that is not
|
||||
recognized as the start of comment, but can be used in
|
||||
recognition and finally, \e<newline> translates to nothing at
|
||||
all, thereby allowing continuation lines.
|
||||
.nr PD 0
|
||||
.IP "Variable replacement"
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The scan recognizes the sequences {{, {NAME} and {NAME?text}
|
||||
Where NAME can be any combination if characters excluding ? and
|
||||
} and text may be anything excluding }.
|
||||
(~\e} is allowed of course~)
|
||||
The first sequence produces an unescaped single {.
|
||||
The second produces the contents of the NAME, definitions are
|
||||
done by \fIack\fP and in description files.
|
||||
When the NAME is not defined an error message is produced on
|
||||
the diagnostic output.
|
||||
The last sequence produces the contents of NAME if it is
|
||||
defined and text otherwise.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.IP "Expression replacement"
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Syntax: (\fIsuffix sequence\fP:\fIsuffix sequence\fP=\fItext\fP)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Example: (.c.p.e:.e=tail_em)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
If the two suffix sequences have a common member \-~\&.e in this
|
||||
case~\- the text is produced.
|
||||
When no common member is present the empty string is produced.
|
||||
Thus the example given is a constant expression.
|
||||
Normally, one of the suffix sequences is produced by variable
|
||||
replacement.
|
||||
\fIAck\fP sets three variables while performing the diverse
|
||||
transformations: HEAD, TAIL and RTS.
|
||||
All three variables depend on the properties \fIrts\fP and
|
||||
\fIneed\fP from the transformations used.
|
||||
Whenever a transformation is used for the first time,
|
||||
the text following the \fIneed\fP is appended to both the HEAD and
|
||||
TAIL variable.
|
||||
The value of the variable RTS is determined by the first
|
||||
transformation used with a \fIrts\fP property.
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
Two runtime flags have effect on the value of one or more of
|
||||
these variables.
|
||||
The flag \fB\-.suffix\fP has the same effect on these three variables
|
||||
as if a file with that \fBsuffix\fP was included in the argument list
|
||||
and had to be translated.
|
||||
The flag \fB\-r.suffix\fP only has that effect on the TAIL
|
||||
variable.
|
||||
The program call names \fIacc\fP and \fIcc\fP have the effect
|
||||
of an automatic \fB\-.c\fP flag.
|
||||
\fIApc\fP and \fIpc\fP have the effect of an automatic \fB\-.p\fP flag.
|
||||
.IP "Line splitting"
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The string is transformed into a sequence of strings by replacing
|
||||
the blank space by string separators (nulls).
|
||||
.IP "IO replacement"
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The > in the string is replaced by the output file name.
|
||||
The < in the string is replaced by the input file name.
|
||||
When multiple input files are present the string is duplicated
|
||||
for each input file name.
|
||||
.nr PD 1v
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Each description is a sequence of variable definitions followed
|
||||
by a sequence of transformation definitions.
|
||||
Variable definitions use a line each, transformations
|
||||
definitions consist of a sequence of lines.
|
||||
Empty lines are discarded, as are lines with nothing but
|
||||
comment.
|
||||
Comment is started by a # character, and continues to the end
|
||||
of the line.
|
||||
Three special two-characters sequences exist: \e#, \e\e and
|
||||
\e<newline>.
|
||||
Their effect is described under 'backslashing' above.
|
||||
Each \- nonempty \- line starts with a keyword, possibly
|
||||
preceded by blank space.
|
||||
The keyword can be followed by a further specification.
|
||||
The two are separated by blank space.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Variable definitions use the keyword \fIvar\fP and look like this:
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
var NAME=text
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The name can be any identifier, the text may contain any
|
||||
character.
|
||||
Blank space before the equal sign is not part of the NAME.
|
||||
Blank space after the equal is considered as part of the text.
|
||||
The text is scanned for variable replacement before it is
|
||||
associated with the variable name.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.sp 2
|
||||
The start of a transformation definition is indicated by the
|
||||
keyword \fIname\fP.
|
||||
The last line of such a definition contains the keyword
|
||||
\fIend\fP.
|
||||
The lines in between associate properties to a transformation
|
||||
and may be presented in any order.
|
||||
The identifier after the \fIname\fP keyword determines the name
|
||||
of the transformation.
|
||||
This name is used for debugging and by the \fB\-R\fP flag.
|
||||
The keywords are used to specify which input suffices are
|
||||
recognized by that transformation,
|
||||
the program to run, the arguments to be handed to that program
|
||||
and the name or suffix of the resulting output file.
|
||||
Two keywords are used to indicate which run-time startoffs and
|
||||
libraries are needed.
|
||||
The possible keywords are:
|
||||
.IP \fIfrom\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
followed by a sequence of suffices.
|
||||
Each file with one of these suffices is allowed as input file.
|
||||
Preprocessor transformations do not need the \fIfrom\fP
|
||||
keyword. All other transformations do.
|
||||
.nr PD 0
|
||||
.IP \fIto\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
followed by the suffix of the output file name or in the case of a
|
||||
linker
|
||||
the output file name.
|
||||
.IP \fIprogram\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
followed by name of the load file of the program, a pathname most likely
|
||||
starts with either a / or {EM}.
|
||||
This keyword must be
|
||||
present, the remainder of the line
|
||||
is subject to backslashing and variable replacement.
|
||||
.IP \fImapflag\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The mapflags are used to grab flags given to \fIack\fP and
|
||||
pass them on to a specific transformation.
|
||||
This feature uses a few simple pattern matching and replacement
|
||||
facilities.
|
||||
Multiple occurrences of this keyword are allowed.
|
||||
This text following the keyword is
|
||||
subjected to backslashing.
|
||||
The keyword is followed by a match expression and a variable
|
||||
assignment separated by blank space.
|
||||
As soon as both description files are read, \fIack\fP looks
|
||||
at all transformations in these files to find a match for the
|
||||
flags given to \fIack\fP.
|
||||
The flags \fB\-m\fP, \fB\-o\fP,
|
||||
\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-r\fP, \fB\-v\fP, \fB\-g\fP, \-\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-t\fP,
|
||||
\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-R\fP and \-\fB\-.\fP are specific to \fIack\fP and
|
||||
not handed down to any transformation.
|
||||
The matching is performed in the order in which the entries
|
||||
appear in the definition.
|
||||
The scanning stops after first match is found.
|
||||
When a match is found, the variable assignment is executed.
|
||||
A * in the match expression matches any sequence of characters,
|
||||
a * in the right hand part of the assignment is
|
||||
replaced by the characters matched by
|
||||
the * in the expression.
|
||||
The right hand part is also subject to variable replacement.
|
||||
The variable will probably be used in the program arguments.
|
||||
The \fB\-l\fP flags are special,
|
||||
the order in which they are presented to \fIack\fP must be
|
||||
preserved.
|
||||
The identifier LNAME is used in conjunction with the scanning of
|
||||
\fB\-l\fP flags.
|
||||
The value assigned to LNAME is used to replace the flag.
|
||||
The example further on shows the use of all this.
|
||||
.IP \fIargs\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The keyword is followed by the program call arguments.
|
||||
It is subject to backslashing, variable replacement, expression
|
||||
replacement, line splitting and IO replacement.
|
||||
The variables assigned to by \fImapflags\fP will probably be
|
||||
used here.
|
||||
The flags not recognized by \fIack\fP or any of the transformations
|
||||
are passed to the linker and inserted before all other arguments.
|
||||
.IP \fIstdin\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that the transformation reads from standard input.
|
||||
.IP \fIstdout\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that the transformation writes on standard output.
|
||||
.IP \fIoptimizer\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The presence of this keyword indicates that this transformation is an optimizer.
|
||||
It can be followed by a number, indicating the "level" of the
|
||||
optimizer (see description of the -O option in the ack(1ACK) manual page).
|
||||
.IP \fIpriority\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This \-~optional~\- keyword is followed by a number. Positive priority means
|
||||
that the transformation is likely to be used, negative priority means that
|
||||
the transformation is unlikely to be used.
|
||||
Priorities can also be set with a ack(1ACK) command line option.
|
||||
Priorities come in handy when there are several implementations of a
|
||||
certain transformation. They can then be used to select a default one.
|
||||
.IP \fIlinker\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that this transformation is the linker.
|
||||
.IP \fIcombiner\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that this transformation is a combiner. A combiner
|
||||
is a program combining several files into one, but is not a linker.
|
||||
An example of a combiner is the global optimizer.
|
||||
.IP \fIprep\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This \-~optional~\- keyword is followed an option indicating its relation
|
||||
to the preprocessor.
|
||||
The possible options are:
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
always the input files must be preprocessed
|
||||
cond the input files must be preprocessed when starting with #
|
||||
is this transformation is the preprocessor
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.IP \fIrts\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This \-~optional~\- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
|
||||
used to set the variable RTS, if it was not already set.
|
||||
Thus the variable RTS is set by the first transformation
|
||||
executed which such a property or as a result from \fIack\fP's program
|
||||
call name (acc, cc, apc or pc) or by the \fB\-.suffix\fP flag.
|
||||
.IP \fIneed\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This \-~optional~\- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
|
||||
concatenated to the HEAD and TAIL variables.
|
||||
This is done once for every transformation used or indicated
|
||||
by one of the program call names mentioned above or indicated
|
||||
by the \fB\-.suffix\fP flag.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.nr PD 1v
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Conventions used in description files
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
\fIAck\fP reads two description files.
|
||||
A few of the variables defined in the machine specific file
|
||||
are used by the descriptions of the front-ends.
|
||||
Other variables, set by \fIack\fP, are of use to all
|
||||
transformations.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
\fIAck\fP sets the variable EM to the home directory of the
|
||||
Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
|
||||
The variable SOURCE is set to the name of the argument that is currently
|
||||
being massaged, this is useful for debugging.
|
||||
The variable SUFFIX is set to the suffix of the argument that is
|
||||
currently being massaged.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The variable M indicates the
|
||||
directory in lib/{M}/tail_..... and NAME is the string to
|
||||
be defined by the preprocessor with \-D{NAME}.
|
||||
The definitions of {w}, {s}, {l}, {d}, {f} and {p} indicate
|
||||
EM_WSIZE, EM_SSIZE, EM_LSIZE, EM_DSIZE, EM_FSIZE and EM_PSIZE
|
||||
respectively.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The variable INCLUDES is used as the last argument to \fIcpp\fP.
|
||||
It is used to add directories to
|
||||
the list of directories containing #include files.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The variables HEAD, TAIL and RTS are set by \fIack\fP and used
|
||||
to compose the arguments for the linker.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Example
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Description for front-end
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
.ta 4n 40n
|
||||
name cpp # the C-preprocessor
|
||||
# no from, it's governed by the P property
|
||||
to .i # result files have suffix i
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/cpp # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
mapflag \-I* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-I* # grab \-I.. \-U.. and
|
||||
mapflag \-U* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-U* # \-D.. to use as arguments
|
||||
mapflag \-D* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-D* # in the variable CPP_F
|
||||
args {CPP_F?} {INCLUDES?} \-D{NAME} \-DEM_WSIZE={w} \-DEM_PSIZE={p} \e
|
||||
\-DEM_SSIZE={s} \-DEM_LSIZE={l} \-DEM_FSIZE={f} \-DEM_DSIZE={d} <
|
||||
# The arguments are: first the \-[IUD]...
|
||||
# then the include dir's for this machine
|
||||
# then the NAME and size values finally
|
||||
# followed by the input file name
|
||||
stdout # Output on stdout
|
||||
prep is # Is preprocessor
|
||||
end
|
||||
name cem # the C-compiler proper
|
||||
from .c # used for files with suffix .c
|
||||
to .k # produces compact code files
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_cem # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
mapflag \-p CEM_F={CEM_F?} \-Xp # pass \-p as \-Xp to cem
|
||||
mapflag \-L CEM_F={CEM_F?} \-l # pass \-L as \-l to cem
|
||||
args \-Vw{w}i{w}p{p}f{f}s{s}l{l}d{d} {CEM_F?}
|
||||
# the arguments are the object sizes in
|
||||
# the \-V... flag and possibly \-l and \-Xp
|
||||
stdin # input from stdin
|
||||
stdout # output on stdout
|
||||
prep always # use cpp
|
||||
rts .c # use the C run-time system
|
||||
need .c # use the C libraries
|
||||
end
|
||||
name decode # make human readable files from compact code
|
||||
from .k.m # accept files with suffix .k or .m
|
||||
to .e # produce .e files
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_decode # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
args < # the input file name is the only argument
|
||||
stdout # the output comes on stdout
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
.ta 4n 40n
|
||||
Example of a backend, in this case the EM assembler/loader.
|
||||
|
||||
var w=2 # wordsize 2
|
||||
var p=2 # pointersize 2
|
||||
var s=2 # short size 2
|
||||
var l=4 # long size 4
|
||||
var f=4 # float size 4
|
||||
var d=8 # double size 8
|
||||
var M=em22
|
||||
var NAME=em22 # for cpp (NAME=em22 results in #define em22 1)
|
||||
var LIB=lib/{M}/tail_ # part of file name for libraries
|
||||
var RT=lib/{M}/head_ # part of file name for run-time startoff
|
||||
var SIZE_FLAG=\-sm # default internal table size flag
|
||||
var INCLUDES=\-I{EM}/include # use {EM}/include for #include files
|
||||
name asld # Assembler/loader
|
||||
from .k.m.a # accepts compact code and archives
|
||||
to e.out # output file name
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_ass # load file pathname
|
||||
mapflag \-l* LNAME={EM}/{LIB}* # e.g. \-ly becomes
|
||||
# {EM}/mach/int/lib/tail_y
|
||||
mapflag \-+* ASS_F={ASS_F?} \-+* # recognize \-+ and \-\-
|
||||
mapflag \-\-* ASS_F={ASS_F?} \-\-*
|
||||
mapflag \-s* SIZE_FLAG=\-s* # overwrite old value of SIZE_FLAG
|
||||
args {SIZE_FLAG} \e
|
||||
({RTS}:.c={EM}/{RT}cc) ({RTS}:.p={EM}/{RT}pc) \-o > < \e
|
||||
(.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}pc) \e
|
||||
(.c:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}cc.1s {EM}/{LIB}cc.2g) \e
|
||||
(.c.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}mon)
|
||||
# \-s[sml] must be first argument
|
||||
# the next line contains the choice for head_cc or head_pc
|
||||
# and the specification of in- and output.
|
||||
# the last three args lines choose libraries
|
||||
linker
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
The command \fIack \-mem22 \-v \-v \-I../h \-L \-ly prog.c\fP
|
||||
would result in the following
|
||||
calls (with exec(II)):
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
.ta 4n
|
||||
1) /lib/cpp \-I../h \-I/usr/em/include \-Dem22 \-DEM_WSIZE=2 \-DEM_PSIZE=2 \e
|
||||
\-DEM_SSIZE=2 \-DEM_LSIZE=4 \-DEM_FSIZE=4 \-DEM_DSIZE=8 prog.c
|
||||
2) /usr/em/lib/em_cem \-Vw2i2p2f4s2l4d8 \-l
|
||||
3) /usr/em/lib/em_ass \-sm /usr/em/lib/em22/head_cc \-o e.out prog.k
|
||||
/usr/em/lib/em22/tail_y /usr/em/lib/em22/tail_cc.1s
|
||||
/usr/em/lib/em22/tail_cc.2g /usr/em/lib/em22/tail_mon
|
||||
.DE
|
365
doc/ansi_C.doc
365
doc/ansi_C.doc
|
@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.de NS
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.in 0
|
||||
\\fBANS \\$1:\\fP
|
||||
..
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
Amsterdam Compiler Kit-ANSI C compiler compliance statements
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
Hans van Eck
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Dept. of Mathematics and Computer Science
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Amsterdam, The Netherlands
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This document specifies the implementation-defined behaviour of the ANSI-C
|
||||
front end of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit as required by ANS X3.159-1989. Since
|
||||
the implementation-defined behaviour sometimes depends on the machine
|
||||
compiling on or for, some items will be left unspecified in this
|
||||
document\(dg.
|
||||
.FS
|
||||
\(dg when cross-compiling, run-time behaviour may be different from
|
||||
compile-time behaviour
|
||||
.FE
|
||||
The compiler assumes that it runs on a UNIX system.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.1
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Diagnostics are placed on the standard error output. They have the
|
||||
following specification:
|
||||
.br
|
||||
"<file>", line <nr>: [(<class>)] <diagnostic>
|
||||
.br
|
||||
There are three classes of diagnostics: "error", "strict" and "warning".
|
||||
When the class is "error", the <class> is absent.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The class "strict" is used for violations of the standard which are
|
||||
not severe enough to stop compilation. An example is the the occurrence
|
||||
of non white-space after an '#else' or '#endif' pre-processing
|
||||
directive. The class "warning" is used for legal but dubious
|
||||
constructions. An example is overflow of constant expressions.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.2
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The function 'main' can have two arguments. The first argument is an
|
||||
integer specifying the number of arguments on the command line. The second
|
||||
argument is a pointer to an array of pointers to the arguments (as
|
||||
strings).
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Interactive devices are terminals.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.3
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The number of significant characters is an option. By default it is 64.
|
||||
There is a distinction between upper and lower case.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.4
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The compiler assumes ASCII-characters in both the source and execution
|
||||
character set.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
There are no multi-byte characters.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
There 8 bits in a character.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Character constants with values that can not be represented in 8 bits
|
||||
are truncated.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Character constants that are more than 1 character wide will have the
|
||||
first character specified in the least significant byte.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The only supported locale is "C".
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A plain 'char' has the same range of values as 'signed char'.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.5
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The compiler assumes that it works on and compiles for a
|
||||
2-complement binary-number system. Shorts will use 2 bytes and longs
|
||||
will use 4 bytes. The size of integers are machine dependent.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Converting an integer to a shorter signed integer is implemented by
|
||||
ignoring the high-order byte(s) of the former.
|
||||
Converting a unsigned integer to a signed integer of the same type is
|
||||
only done in administration. This means that the bit-pattern remains
|
||||
unchanged.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The result of bitwise operations on signed integers are what can be
|
||||
expected on a 2-complement machine.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
If either operand is negative, whether the result of the / operator is the
|
||||
largest integer less than or equal to the algebraic quotient or the
|
||||
smallest integer greater than or equal to the algebraic quotient is machine
|
||||
dependent, as is the sign of the result of the % operator.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The right-shift of a negative value is negative.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.6
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The representation of floating-point values is machine-dependent.
|
||||
When native floating-point is not present an IEEE-emulation is used.
|
||||
The compiler uses high-precision floating-point for constant folding.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Truncation is always to the nearest floating-point number that can
|
||||
be represented.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.7
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The type returned by the sizeof-operator (also known as size_t)
|
||||
is 'unsigned int'. This is done for backward compatibility reasons.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Casting an integer to a pointer or vice versa has no effect in
|
||||
bit-pattern when the sizes are equal. Otherwise the value will be
|
||||
truncated or zero-extended (depending on the direction of the
|
||||
conversion and the relative sizes).
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
When a pointer is as large as an integer, the type of a 'ptrdiff_t' will
|
||||
be 'int'. Otherwise the type will be 'long'.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.8
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Since the front end has only limited control over the registers, it can
|
||||
only make it more likely that variables that are declared as
|
||||
registers also end up in registers. The only things that can possibly be
|
||||
put into registers are : 'int', 'long', 'float', 'double', 'long double'
|
||||
and pointers.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.9
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
When a member of a union object is accessed using a member of a
|
||||
different type, the resulting value will usually be garbage. The
|
||||
compiler makes no effort to catch these errors.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The alignment of types is a compile-time option. The alignment of
|
||||
a structure-member is the alignment of its type. Usually, the
|
||||
alignment is passed on to the compiler by the 'ack' program. When a
|
||||
user wants to do this manually, he/she should be prepared for trouble.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A "plain" 'int' bit-field is taken as a 'signed int'. This means that
|
||||
a field with a size of 1 bit can only store the values 0 and -1.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The order of allocation of bit-fields is a compile-time option. By
|
||||
default, high-order bits are allocated first.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
An enum has the same size as a "plain" 'int'.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.10
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
An access to a volatile declared variable is done by just mentioning
|
||||
the variable. E.g. the statement "x;" where x is declared volatile,
|
||||
constitutes an access.
|
||||
.S A.6.3.11
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
There is no fixed limit on the number of declarators that may modify an
|
||||
arithmetic, structure or union type, although specifying too many may
|
||||
cause the compiler to run out of memory.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.12
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The maximum number of cases in a switch-statement is in the order of
|
||||
1e9, although the compiler may run out of memory somewhat earlier.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.13
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Since both the pre-processor and the compiler assume ASCII-characters,
|
||||
a single character constant in a conditional-inclusion directive
|
||||
matches the same value in the execution character set.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The pre-processor recognizes -I... command-line options. The
|
||||
directories thus specified are searched first. After that, depending on the
|
||||
command that the preprocessor is called with, machine/system-dependant
|
||||
directories are searched. After that, ~em/include/_tail_ac and
|
||||
/usr/include are visited.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Quoted names are first looked for in the directory in which the file
|
||||
which does the include resides.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The characters in a h- or q- char-sequence are taken to be UNIX
|
||||
paths.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Neither the compiler nor the preprocessor know any pragmas.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Since the compiler runs on UNIX, __DATE__ and __TIME__ will always be
|
||||
defined.
|
||||
.NS A.6.3.14
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
NULL is defined as ((void *)0). This in order to flag dubious
|
||||
constructions like "int x = NULL;".
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The diagnostic printed by 'assert' is as follows:
|
||||
.ti +4n
|
||||
"Assertion "<expr>" failed, file "<file>", line <line>",
|
||||
.br
|
||||
where <expr> is the argument to the assert macro, printed as string.
|
||||
(the <file> and <line> should be clear)
|
||||
.KS
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The sets for character test macros.
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
name: set:
|
||||
isalnum() 0-9A-Za-z
|
||||
isalpha() A-Za-z
|
||||
iscntrl() \e000-\e037\e177
|
||||
islower() a-z
|
||||
isupper() A-Z
|
||||
isprint() <space>-~ (== \e040-\e176)
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.KE
|
||||
As an addition, there is an isascii() macro, which tests whether a character
|
||||
is an ascii character. Characters in the range from \e000 to \e177 are ascii
|
||||
characters.
|
||||
.KS
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The behaviour of mathematic functions on domain error:
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l c
|
||||
l n.
|
||||
name: returns:
|
||||
asin() 0.0
|
||||
acos() 0.0
|
||||
atan2() 0.0
|
||||
fmod() 0.0
|
||||
log() -HUGE_VAL
|
||||
log10() -HUGE_VAL
|
||||
pow() 0.0
|
||||
sqrt() 0.0
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.KE
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Underflow range errors do not cause errno to be set.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The function fmod() returns 0.0 and sets errno to EDOM when the second
|
||||
argument is 0.0.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The set of signals for the signal() function depends on the UNIX-system
|
||||
which the compiler is compiling for. The default handling, semantics
|
||||
and behaviour of these signals are those specified by the operating
|
||||
system vendor. The default handling is not reset when SIGILL is
|
||||
received.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A text-stream need not end in a new-line character.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
White space characters before a new-line appear when read in.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
There may be any number of null characters appended to a binary
|
||||
stream.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The file position indicator of an append mode stream is initially
|
||||
positioned at the beginning of the file.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A write on a text stream does not cause the associated file to be
|
||||
truncated beyond that point.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The buffering intended by the standard is fully supported.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A zero-length file actually exists.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A file name can consist of any character, except for the '\e0' and
|
||||
the '/'.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A file can be open multiple times.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
When a remove() is done on an open file, reading and writing behave
|
||||
just as can be expected from a non-removed file. When the associated
|
||||
stream is closed, all written data will be lost.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
When a file exists prior to a call to rename(), the behaviour is that
|
||||
of the underlying UNIX system. Normally, the call would fail.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The %p conversion in fprintf() has the same effect as %#x or %#lx,
|
||||
depending on the sizes of pointer and integer.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The %p conversion in fscanf() has the same effect as %x or %lx,
|
||||
depending on the sizes of pointer and integer.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A - character that is neither the first nor the last character in the
|
||||
scanlist for %[ conversion is taken to be a range indicator. When the
|
||||
first character has a higher ASCII-value than the second, the - will
|
||||
just be put into the scanlist.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The value of errno when fgetpos() or ftell() failed is that of lseek().
|
||||
This means:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP "EBADF \-" 10
|
||||
when the stream is not valid
|
||||
.IP "ESPIPE \-"
|
||||
when fildes is associated with a pipe (and on some systems: sockets)
|
||||
.IP "EINVAL \-"
|
||||
the resulting file pointer would be negative
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The messages generated by perror() depend on the value of errno.
|
||||
The mapping of errors to strings is done by strerror().
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
When the requested size is zero, malloc(), calloc() and realloc()
|
||||
return a null-pointer.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
When abort() is called, output buffers will be flushed. Temporary files
|
||||
(made with the tmpfile() function) will have disappeared when SIGABRT
|
||||
is not caught or ignored.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The exit() function returns the low-order eight bits of its argument
|
||||
to the environment.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The predefined environment names are controlled by the user.
|
||||
Setting environment variables is done through the putenv() function.
|
||||
This function accepts a pointer to char as its argument.
|
||||
To set f.i. the environment variable TERM to a230 one writes
|
||||
.ti +4n
|
||||
putenv("TERM=a230");
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The argument to putenv() is stored in an internal table, so malloc'ed
|
||||
strings can not be freed until another call to putenv() (which sets the
|
||||
same environment variable) is made. The function returns 1 if it fails,
|
||||
0 otherwise.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The argument to system is passed as argument to /bin/sh -c.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The strings returned by strerror() depend on errno in the following
|
||||
way:
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
errno string
|
||||
0 "Error 0",
|
||||
EPERM "Not owner",
|
||||
ENOENT "No such file or directory",
|
||||
ESRCH "No such process",
|
||||
EINTR "Interrupted system call",
|
||||
EIO "I/O error",
|
||||
ENXIO "No such device or address",
|
||||
E2BIG "Arg list too long",
|
||||
ENOEXEC "Exec format error",
|
||||
EBADF "Bad file number",
|
||||
ECHILD "No children",
|
||||
EAGAIN "No more processes",
|
||||
ENOMEM "Not enough core",
|
||||
EACCES "Permission denied",
|
||||
EFAULT "Bad address",
|
||||
ENOTBLK "Block device required",
|
||||
EBUSY "Mount device busy",
|
||||
EEXIST "File exists",
|
||||
EXDEV "Cross-device link",
|
||||
ENODEV "No such device",
|
||||
ENOTDIR "Not a directory",
|
||||
EISDIR "Is a directory",
|
||||
EINVAL "Invalid argument",
|
||||
ENFILE "File table overflow",
|
||||
EMFILE "Too many open files",
|
||||
ENOTTY "Not a typewriter",
|
||||
ETXTBSY "Text file busy",
|
||||
EFBUG "File too large",
|
||||
ENOSPC "No space left on device",
|
||||
ESPIPE "Illegal seek",
|
||||
EROFS "Read-only file system",
|
||||
EMLINK "Too many links",
|
||||
EPIPE "Broken pipe",
|
||||
EDOM "Math argument",
|
||||
ERANGE "Result too large"
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
everything else causes strerror() to return "unknown error"
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The local time zone is per default MET (GMT + 1:00:00). This can be
|
||||
changed through the TZ environment variable, or by some changes in the
|
||||
sources.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The clock() function returns the number of ticks since process
|
||||
startup.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
References
|
||||
.IP [1]
|
||||
ANS X3.159-1989
|
||||
.I
|
||||
American National Standard for Information Systems -
|
||||
Programming Language C
|
||||
.R
|
949
doc/basic.doc
949
doc/basic.doc
|
@ -1,949 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.\" $Id$
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
.de Sy
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.IP \fBsyntax\fR 10
|
||||
..
|
||||
.de PU
|
||||
.IP \fBpurpose\fR 10
|
||||
..
|
||||
.de RM
|
||||
.IP \fBremarks\fR 10
|
||||
..
|
||||
The ABC compiler
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
Martin L. Kersten
|
||||
Gert-Jan Akkerman
|
||||
Marcel Worring
|
||||
Edo Westerhuis
|
||||
Frans Kunst
|
||||
Ronnie Lachniet
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Department of Mathematics and Computer Science.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Free University
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Amsterdam
|
||||
.AB
|
||||
This manual describes the
|
||||
programming language BASIC and its compiler
|
||||
included in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
|
||||
.AE
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
INTRODUCTION.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The BASIC-EM compiler is an extensive implementation of the
|
||||
programming language BASIC.
|
||||
The language structure and semantics are modelled after the
|
||||
BASIC interpreter/compiler of Microsoft (tr), a short comparison
|
||||
is provided in appendix A.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The compiler generates code for a virtual machine, the EM machine
|
||||
[[ACM, etc]].
|
||||
Using EM as an intermediate machine results in a highly portable
|
||||
compiler and BASIC code.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The drawback of EM is that it does not directly reflect one particular
|
||||
hardware design, which means that many of the low level operations available
|
||||
within BASIC are ill-defined or even inapplicable.
|
||||
To mention a few, the peek and poke instructions are likely
|
||||
to be behave errorneous, while line printer and tapedeck
|
||||
primitives are unknown.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
This manual is divided into three chapters.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Chapter 1 discusses the general language syntax and semantics.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Chapter 2 describes the statements available in BASIC-EM.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Chapter 3 describes the predefined functions, ordered alphabetically.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Appendix A discusses the differences with Microsoft BASIC.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Appendix B describes all reserved symbols.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
SYNTAX NOTATION
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The conventions for syntax presentation are as follows:
|
||||
.IP CAPS 10
|
||||
Items are reserved words, must be input as shown.
|
||||
.IP <> 10
|
||||
Items in lowercase letters enclosed in angular brackets
|
||||
are to be supplied by the user.
|
||||
.IP [] 10
|
||||
Items are optional.
|
||||
.IP \.\.\. 10
|
||||
Items may be repeated any number of times
|
||||
.IP {} 10
|
||||
A choice between two or more alternatives. At least one of the entries
|
||||
must be chosen.
|
||||
.IP | 10
|
||||
Vertical bars separate the choices within braces.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
All punctuation must be included where shown.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
GENERAL INFORMATION
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The BASIC-EM compiler is designed for a UNIX based environment.
|
||||
It accepts a text file with a BASIC program (suffix .b) and generates
|
||||
an executable file, called a.out.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
LINE FORMAT
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
A BASIC program consists of a series of lines, starting with a
|
||||
positive line number in the range 0 to 32767.
|
||||
A line may consists of more than one physical line on a terminal, but
|
||||
is limited to 1024 characters.
|
||||
Multiple BASIC statements may be placed on a single line, provided
|
||||
they are separated by a colon (:).
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
CONSTANTS
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The BASIC compiler character set is comprised of alphabetic
|
||||
characters, numeric characters, and special characters shown below.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
= + - * / ^ ( ) % # $ \\ _
|
||||
! [ ] , . ; : & ' ? > < \\ (blanc)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
BASIC uses two different types of constants during processing:
|
||||
numeric and string constants.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
A string constant is a sequence of characters taken from the ASCII
|
||||
character set enclosed by double quotation marks.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Numeric constants are positive or negative numbers, grouped into
|
||||
five different classes.
|
||||
.IP "a) integer constants" 25
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Whole numbers in the range of -32768 and 32767. Integer constants do
|
||||
not contain decimal points.
|
||||
.IP "b) fixed point constants" 25
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Positive or negative real numbers, i.e. numbers with a decimal point.
|
||||
.IP "c) floating point constants" 25
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Real numbers in scientific notation. A floating point constant
|
||||
consists of an optional signed integer or fixed point number
|
||||
followed by the letter E (or D) and an optional signed integer
|
||||
(the exponent).
|
||||
The allowable range of floating point constants is 10^-38 to 10^+38.
|
||||
.IP "d) Hex constants" 25
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Hexadecimal numbers, denoted by the prefix &H.
|
||||
.IP "e) Octal constants" 25
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Octal numbers, denoted by the prefix &O.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
VARIABLES
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Variables are names used to represent values in a BASIC program.
|
||||
A variable is assigned a value by assigment specified in the program.
|
||||
Before a variable is assigned its value is assumed to be zero.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Variable names are composed of letters, digits or the decimal point,
|
||||
starting with a letter. Up to 40 characters are significant.
|
||||
A variable name can be followed by any of the following type
|
||||
declaration characters:
|
||||
.IP % 5
|
||||
Defines an integer variable
|
||||
.IP ! 5
|
||||
Defines a single precision variable (see below)
|
||||
.IP # 5
|
||||
Defines a double precision variable
|
||||
.IP $ 5
|
||||
Defines a string variable.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Beside single valued variables, values may be grouped into tables or arrays.
|
||||
Each element in an array is referenced by the array name and an index,
|
||||
such a variable is called a subscripted variable.
|
||||
An array has as many subscripts as there are dimensions in the array,
|
||||
the maximum of which is 11.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
If a variable starts with FN it is assumed to be a call to a user defined
|
||||
function.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
A variable name may not be a reserved word nor the name
|
||||
of a predefined function.
|
||||
A list of all reserved identifiers is included as Appendix B.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
NOTES:
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Two variables with the same name but different type is
|
||||
considered illegal.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The type of a variable without typedeclaration-character is set,
|
||||
at it's first occurence in the program,
|
||||
to the defaulttype which is (in this implementation) double precision.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Multi-dimensional array's must be declared before use (see
|
||||
DIM-statement ).
|
||||
.br
|
||||
BASIC-EM differs from Microsoft BASIC in supporting floats in one precision
|
||||
only (due to EM), eg doubles and floats have the same precision.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
EXPRESSIONS
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
When necessary the compiler will convert a numeric value from
|
||||
one type to another.
|
||||
A value is always converted to the precision of the variable it is assigned
|
||||
to.
|
||||
When a floating point value is converted to an integer the fractional
|
||||
portion is rounded.
|
||||
In an expression all values are converted to the same degree of precision,
|
||||
i.e. that of the most precise operand.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Division by zero results in the message "Division by zero".
|
||||
If overflow (or underflow) occurs, the "Overflow (underflow)" message is
|
||||
displayed and execution is terminated (contrary to Microsoft).
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Arithmetic
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The arithmetic operators in order of precedence,a re:
|
||||
.DS L
|
||||
^ Exponentiation
|
||||
- Negation
|
||||
*,/,\\\\\\\\,MOD Multiplication, Division, Remainder
|
||||
+,- Addition, Substraction
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The operator \\\\ denotes integer division, its operands are rounded to
|
||||
integers before the operator is applied.
|
||||
Modulus arithmetic is denoted by the operator MOD, which yields the
|
||||
integer value that is the remainder of an integer division.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The order in which operators are performed can be changed with parentheses.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Relational
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The relational operators in order of precedence, are:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
= Equality
|
||||
<> Inequality
|
||||
< Less than
|
||||
> Greater than
|
||||
<= Less than or equal to
|
||||
>= Greater than or equal to
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The relational operators are used to compare two values and returns
|
||||
either "true" (-1) or "false" (0) (See IF statement).
|
||||
The precedence of the relational operators is lower
|
||||
then the arithmetic operators.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Logical
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The logical operators performs tests on multiple relations, bit manipulations,
|
||||
or boolean operations.
|
||||
The logical operators returns a bitwise result ("true" or "false").
|
||||
In an expression, logical operators are performed after the relational and
|
||||
arithmetic operators.
|
||||
The logical operators work by converting their operands to signed
|
||||
two-complement integers in the range -32768 to 32767.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
NOT Bitwise negation
|
||||
AND Bitwise and
|
||||
OR Bitwise or
|
||||
XOR Bitwise exclusive or
|
||||
EQV Bitwise equivalence
|
||||
IMP Bitwise implies
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Functional
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
A function is used in an expression to call a system or user defined
|
||||
function.
|
||||
A list of predefined functions is presented in chapter 3.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
String operations
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Strings can be concatenated by using +. Strings can be compared with
|
||||
the relational operators. String comparison is performed in lexicographic
|
||||
order.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
ERROR MESSAGES
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The occurence of an error results in termination of the program
|
||||
unless an ON....ERROR statement has been encountered.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
B-EM STATEMENTS
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
This chapter describes the statements available within the BASIC-EM
|
||||
compiler. Each description is formatted as follows:
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
Shows the correct syntax for the statement. See introduction of
|
||||
syntax notation above.
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
Describes the purpose and details of the instructions.
|
||||
.RM
|
||||
Describes special cases, deviation from Microsoft BASIC etc.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
CALL
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
CALL <variable name>[(<argument list>)]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
The CALL statement provides the means to execute procedures
|
||||
and functions written in another language included in the
|
||||
Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
|
||||
The argument list consist of (subscripted) variables.
|
||||
The BASIC compiler pushes the address of the arguments on the stack in order
|
||||
of encounter.
|
||||
.RM
|
||||
Not yet available.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
CLOSE
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
CLOSE [[#]<file number>[,[#]<file number...>]]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To terminate I/O on a disk file.
|
||||
<file number> is the number associated with the file
|
||||
when it was OPENed (See OPEN-statement). Ommission of parameters results in closing
|
||||
all files.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The END statement and STOP statement always issue a CLOSE of
|
||||
all files.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
DATA
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
DATA <list of constants>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
DATA statements are used to construct a data bank of values that are
|
||||
accessed by the program's READ statement.
|
||||
DATA statements are non-executable,
|
||||
the data items are assembled in a data file by the BASIC compiler.
|
||||
This file can be replaced, provided the layout remains
|
||||
the same (otherwise the RESTORE won't function properly).
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The list of data items consists of numeric and string constants
|
||||
as discussed in section 1.
|
||||
Moreover, string constants starting with a letter and not
|
||||
containing blancs, newlines, commas, colon need not be enclosed with
|
||||
the string quotes.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
DATA statements can be reread using the RESTORE statement.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
DEF FN
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
DEF FN<name> [(<parameterlist>)]=<expression>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To define and name a function that is written by the user.
|
||||
<name> must be an identifier and should be preceded by FN,
|
||||
which is considered integral part of the function name.
|
||||
<expression> defines the expression to be evaluated upon function call.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The parameter list is comprised of a comma separated
|
||||
list of variable names, used within the function definition,
|
||||
that are to replaced by values upon function call.
|
||||
The variable names defined in the parameterlist, called formal
|
||||
parameters, do not affect the definition and use of variables
|
||||
defined with the same name in the rest of the BASIC program.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
A type declaration character may be suffixed to the function name to
|
||||
designate the data type of the function result.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
DEFINT/SNG/DBL/STR
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
DEF<type> <range of letters>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
Any undefined variable starting with the letter included in the range of
|
||||
letters is declared of type <type> unless a type declaration character
|
||||
is appended.
|
||||
The range of letters is a comma separated list of characters and
|
||||
character ranges (<letter>-<letter>).
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
DIM
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
DIM <list of subscripted variable>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
The DIM statement allocates storage for subscripted variables.
|
||||
If an undefined subscripted variable is used
|
||||
the maximum value of the array subscript is assumed to be 10.
|
||||
A subscript out of range is signalled by the program (when ACK works)
|
||||
The minimum subscript value is 0, unless the OPTION BASE statement has been
|
||||
encountered.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
All variables in a subscripted variable are initially zero.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
BUGS. Multi-dimensional arrays MUST be defined. Subscript out of range is
|
||||
left unnotified.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
END
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
END
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
END terminates a BASIC program and returns to the UNIX shell.
|
||||
An END statement at the end of the BASIC program is optional.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
ERR and ERL
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
<identifier name>= ERR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
<identifier name>= ERL
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
Whenever an error occurs the variable ERR contains the
|
||||
error number and ERL the BASIC line where the error occurred.
|
||||
The variables are usually used in error handling routines
|
||||
provided by the user.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
ERROR
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
ERROR <integer expression>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To simulate the occurrence of a BASIC error.
|
||||
To define a private error code a value must be used that is not already in
|
||||
use by the BASIC runtime system.
|
||||
The list of error messages currently in use can be found in appendix B.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
FIELD
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To be implemented.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
FOR...NEXT
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
FOR <variable>= <low>TO<high>[STEP<size>]
|
||||
.br
|
||||
......
|
||||
.br
|
||||
NEXT [<variable>][,<variable>...]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
The FOR statements allows a series of statements to be performed
|
||||
repeatedly. <variable> is used as a counter. During the first
|
||||
execution pass it is assigned the value <low>,
|
||||
an arithmetic expression. After each pass the counter
|
||||
is incremented (decremented) with the step size <size>, an expression.
|
||||
Ommission of the step size is intepreted as an increment of 1.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Execution of the program lines specified between the FOR and the NEXT
|
||||
statement is terminated as soon as <low> is greater (less) than <high>
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The NEXT statement is labeled with the name(s) of the counter to be
|
||||
incremented.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The variables mentioned in the NEXT statement may be ommitted, in which case
|
||||
the variable of increment the counter of the most recent FOR statement.
|
||||
If a NEXT statement is encountered before its corresponding FOR statement,
|
||||
the error message "NEXT without FOR" is generated.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
GET
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
GET [#]<file number>[, <record number>]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To be implemented.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
GOSUB...RETURN
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
GOSUB <line number>
|
||||
...
|
||||
.br
|
||||
RETURN
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
The GOSUB statement branches to the first statement of a subroutine.
|
||||
The RETURN statement cause a branch back to the statement following the
|
||||
most recent GOSUB statement.
|
||||
A subroutine may contain more than one RETURN statement.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Subroutines may be called recursively.
|
||||
Nesting of subroutine calls is limited, upon exceeding the maximum depth
|
||||
the error message "XXXXX" is displayed.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
GOTO
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
GOTO <line number>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To branch unconditionally to a specified line in the program.
|
||||
If <line number> does not exists, the compilation error message
|
||||
"Line not defined" is displayed.
|
||||
.RM
|
||||
Microsoft BASIC continues at the first line
|
||||
equal or greater then the line specified.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
IF...THEN
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
.br
|
||||
IF <expression> THEN {<statements>|<line number>}
|
||||
[ELSE {<statements>|<line number>}]
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
IF <expression> GOTO <line number>
|
||||
[ELSE {<statements>|<line number>}]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
The IF statement is used
|
||||
to make a decision regarding the program flow based on the
|
||||
result of the expressions.
|
||||
If the expression is not zero, the THEN or GOTO clause is
|
||||
executed. If the result of <expression> is zero, the THEN or
|
||||
GOTO clause is ignored and the ELSE clause, if present is
|
||||
executed.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
IF..THEN..ELSE statements may be nested.
|
||||
Nesting is limited by the length of the line.
|
||||
The ELSE clause matches with the closests unmatched THEN.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When using IF to test equality for a value that is the
|
||||
result of a floating point expression, remember that the
|
||||
internal representation of the value may not be exact.
|
||||
Therefore, the test should be against a range to
|
||||
handle the relative error.
|
||||
.RM
|
||||
Microsoft BASIC allows a comma before THEN.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
INPUT
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
INPUT [;][<"prompt string">;]<list of variables>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
An INPUT statement can be used to obtain values from the user at the
|
||||
terminal.
|
||||
When an INPUT statement is encountered a question mark is printed
|
||||
to indicate the program is awaiting data.
|
||||
IF <"prompt string"> is included, the string is printed before the
|
||||
the question mark. The question mark is suppressed when the prompt
|
||||
string is followed by a comma, rather then a semicolon.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
For each variable in the variable a list a value should be supplied.
|
||||
Data items presented should be separated by a comma.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The type of the variable in the variable list must aggree with the
|
||||
type of the data item entered. Responding with too few or too many
|
||||
data items causes the message "?Redo". No assignment of input values
|
||||
is made until an acceptable response is given.
|
||||
.RM
|
||||
The option to disgard the carriage return with the semicolon after the
|
||||
input symbol is not yet implemented.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
INPUT [#]
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
INPUT #<file number>,<list of variables>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
The purpose of the INPUT# statement is to read data items from a sequential
|
||||
file and assign them to program variables.
|
||||
<file number> is the number used to open the file for input.
|
||||
The variables mentioned are (subscripted) variables.
|
||||
The type of the data items read should aggree with the type of the variables.
|
||||
A type mismatch results in the error message "XXXXX".
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The data items on the sequential file are separated by commas and newlines.
|
||||
In scanning the file, leading spaces, new lines, tabs, and
|
||||
carriage returns are ignored. The first character encountered
|
||||
is assumed to be the state of a new item.
|
||||
String items need not be enclosed with double quotes, provided
|
||||
it does not contain spaces, tabs, newlines and commas,
|
||||
.RM
|
||||
Microsoft BASIC won't assign values until the end of input statement.
|
||||
This means that the user has to supply all the information.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
LET
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
[LET]<variable>=<expression>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To assign the value of an expression to a (subscribted) variable.
|
||||
The type convertions as dictated in chapter 1 apply.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
LINE INPUT
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
LINE INPUT [;][<"prompt string">;]<string variable>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
An entire line of input is assigned to the string variable.
|
||||
See INPUT for the meaning of the <"prompt string"> option.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
LINE INPUT [#]
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
LINE INPUT #<file number>,<string variable>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
Read an entire line of text from a sequential file <file number>
|
||||
and assign it to a string variable.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
LSET and RSET
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To be implemented
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
MID$
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
MID$(<string expr1>,n[,m])=<string expr2>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To replace a portion of a string with another string value.
|
||||
The characters of <string expr2> replaces characters in <string expr1>
|
||||
starting at position n. If m is present, at most m characters are copied,
|
||||
otherwise all characters are copied.
|
||||
However, the string obtained never exceeds the length of string expr1.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
ON ERROR GOTO
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
ON ERROR GOTO <line number>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To enable error handling within the BASIC program.
|
||||
An error may result from arithmetic errors, disk problems, interrupts, or
|
||||
as a result of the ERROR statement.
|
||||
After printing an error message the program is continued at the
|
||||
statements associated with <line number>.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Error handling is disabled using ON ERROR GOTO 0.
|
||||
Subsequent errors result in an error message and program termination.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
ON...GOSUB and ON ...GOTO
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
ON <expression> GOSUB <list of line numbers>
|
||||
.br
|
||||
ON <expression> GOTO <list of line numbers>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To branch to one of several specified line numbers or subroutines, based
|
||||
on the result of the <expression>. The list of line numbers are considered
|
||||
the first, second, etc alternative. Branching to the first occurs when
|
||||
the expression evaluates to one, to the second alternative on two, etc.
|
||||
If the value of the expression is zero or greater than the number of alternatives, processing continues at the first statement following the ON..GOTO
|
||||
(ON GOSUB) statement.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
When the expression results in a negative number the
|
||||
an "Illegal function call" error occurs.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
BUG If the value of the expression is zero or greater than the number of
|
||||
alternatives, processing does NOT continue at the first statement
|
||||
following the ON..GOTO (ON GOSUB) statement.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
OPEN
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
OPEN {"i" | "o" | "r" } , [#]<file number> , <file-name>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To open <file-name> (filename should be quoted) for input/reading or output.
|
||||
If file is not opened for output it has to be existent, otherwise an
|
||||
"file not found" error will occur.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
OPTION BASE
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
OPTION BASE n
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To declare the lower bound of subsequent array subscripts as either
|
||||
0 or 1. The default lower bound is zero.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
POKE
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
POKE <expr1>,<expr2>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To poke around in memory. The use of this statement is not recommended,
|
||||
because it requires full understanding of both
|
||||
the implementation of the Amsterdam
|
||||
Compiler Kit and the hardware characteristics.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
PRINT
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
PRINT <list of variables and/or constants>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To print constants or the contents of variables on the terminal-device.
|
||||
If the variables or constants are seperated by comma's the values will
|
||||
be printed seperated by tabs.
|
||||
If the variables or constants are seperated by semi-colon's the values
|
||||
will be printed without spaces in between.
|
||||
The new-line generated at the end of the print-statement can be suppressed by
|
||||
a semi-colon at the end of list of variables or constants.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
PRINT USING
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To be implemented
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
PUT
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To be implemented
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
RANDOMIZE
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
RANDOMIZE [<expression>]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To reset the random seed. When the expression is ommitted, the system
|
||||
will ask for a value between -32768 and 32767.
|
||||
The random number generator returns the same sequence of values provided
|
||||
the same seed is used.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
READ
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
READ <list of variables>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To read values from the DATA statements and assign them to variables.
|
||||
The type of the variables should match to the type of the items being read,
|
||||
otherwise a "Syntax error" occurs. If all data is read the message "Out of
|
||||
data" will be displayed.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
REM
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
REM <remark>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To include explantory information in a program.
|
||||
The REM statements are not executed.
|
||||
A single quote has the same effect as : REM, which
|
||||
allows for the inclusion of comment at the end of the line.
|
||||
.RM
|
||||
Microsoft BASIC does not allow REM statements as part of
|
||||
DATA lines.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
RESTORE
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
RESTORE [<line number>]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To allow DATA statements to be re-read from a specific line.
|
||||
After a RESTORE statement is executed, the next READ accesses
|
||||
the first item of the DATA statements.
|
||||
If <line number> is specified, the next READ accesses the first
|
||||
item in the specified line.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Note that data statements result in a sequential datafile generated
|
||||
by the compiler, being read by the read statements.
|
||||
This data file may be replaced using the operating system functions
|
||||
with a modified version, provided the same layout of items
|
||||
(same number of lines and items per line) is used.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
STOP
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
STOP
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To terminate the execution of a program and return to the operating system
|
||||
command interpreter. A STOP statement results in the message "Break in line
|
||||
???"
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
SWAP
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
SWAP <variable>,<variable>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To exchange the values of two variables.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
BUG. Strings cannot be swapped !
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
TRON/TROFF
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
TRON
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
TROFF
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
As an aid in debugging the TRON statement results in a program
|
||||
listing each line being interpreted. TROFF disables generation of
|
||||
this code.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
WHILE...WEND
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
WHILE <expression>
|
||||
.....
|
||||
WEND
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To execute a series of BASIC statements as long as a conditional expression
|
||||
is true. WHILE...WEND loops may be nested.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
WRITE
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
WRITE [<list of expressions>]
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To write data at the terminal in DATA statement layout conventions.
|
||||
The expressions should be separated by commas.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
WRITE #
|
||||
.Sy
|
||||
WRITE #<file number> ,<list of expressions>
|
||||
.PU
|
||||
To write a sequential data file, being opened with the "O" mode.
|
||||
The values are being writting using the DATA statements layout conventions.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
FUNCTIONS
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.IP ABS(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the absolute value of expression X
|
||||
.IP ASC(X$) 25
|
||||
Returns the numeric value of the first character of the string.
|
||||
If X$ is not initialized an "Illegal function call" error
|
||||
is returned.
|
||||
.IP ATN(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the arctangent of X in radians. Result is in the range
|
||||
of -pi/2 to pi/2.
|
||||
.IP CDBL(X) 25
|
||||
Converts X to a double precision number.
|
||||
.IP CHR$(X) 25
|
||||
Converts the integer value X to its ASCII character.
|
||||
X must be in the range of 0 to 257.
|
||||
It is used for cursor addressing and generating bel signals.
|
||||
.IP CINT(X) 25
|
||||
Converts X to an integer by rounding the fractional portion.
|
||||
If X is not in the range -32768 to 32767 an "Overflow"
|
||||
error occurs.
|
||||
.IP COS(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the cosine of X in radians.
|
||||
.IP CSNG(X) 25
|
||||
Converts X to a single precision number.
|
||||
.IP CVI(<2-bytes>) 25
|
||||
Convert two byte string value to integer number.
|
||||
.IP CVS(<4-bytes>) 25
|
||||
Convert four byte string value to single precision number.
|
||||
.IP CVD(<8-bytes>) 25
|
||||
Convert eight byte string value to double precision number.
|
||||
.IP EOF[(<file-number>)] 25
|
||||
Returns -1 (true) if the end of a sequential file has been reached.
|
||||
.IP EXP(X) 25
|
||||
Returns e(base of natural logarithm) to the power of X.
|
||||
X should be less then 10000.0.
|
||||
.IP FIX(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the truncated integer part of X. FIX(X) is
|
||||
equivalent to SGN(X)*INT(ABS(X)).
|
||||
The major difference between FIX and INT is that FIX does not
|
||||
return the next lower number for negative X.
|
||||
.IP HEX$(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the string which represents the hexadecimal value of
|
||||
the decimal argument. X is rounded to an integer using CINT
|
||||
before HEX$ is evaluated.
|
||||
.IP INT(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the largest integer <= X.
|
||||
.IP INP$(X[,[#]Y]) 25
|
||||
Returns the string of X characters read from the terminal or
|
||||
the designated file.
|
||||
.IP LEN(X$) 25
|
||||
Returns the number of characters in the string X$.
|
||||
Non printable and blancs are counted too.
|
||||
.IP LOC(<file\ number>) 25
|
||||
For sequential files LOC returns
|
||||
position of the read/write head, counted in number of bytes.
|
||||
For random files the function returns the record number just
|
||||
read or written from a GET or PUT statement.
|
||||
If nothing was read or written 0 is returned.
|
||||
.IP LOG(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the natural logarithm of X. X must be greater than zero.
|
||||
.IP MID$(X,I,[J]) 25
|
||||
Returns first J characters from string X starting at position I in X.
|
||||
If J is omitted all characters starting of from position I in X are returned.
|
||||
.IP MKI$(X) 25
|
||||
Converts an integer expression to a two-byte string.
|
||||
.IP MKS$(X) 25
|
||||
Converts a single precision expression to a four-byte string.
|
||||
.IP MKD$(X) 25
|
||||
Converts a double precision expression to a eight-byte string.
|
||||
.IP OCT$(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the string which represents the octal value of the decimal
|
||||
argument. X is rounded to an integer using CINT before OCTS is evaluated.
|
||||
.IP PEEK(I) 25
|
||||
Returns the byte read from the indicated memory. (Of limited use
|
||||
in the context of ACK)
|
||||
.IP POS(I) 25
|
||||
Returns the current cursor position. To be implemented.
|
||||
.IP RIGHT$(X$,I)
|
||||
Returns the right most I characters of string X$.
|
||||
If I=0 then the empty string is returned.
|
||||
.IP RND(X) 25
|
||||
Returns a random number between 0 and 1. X is a dummy argument.
|
||||
.IP SGN(X) 25
|
||||
If X>0 , SGN(X) returns 1.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
if X=0, SGN(X) returns 0.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
if X<0, SGN(X) returns -1.
|
||||
.IP SIN(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the sine of X in radians.
|
||||
.IP SPACE$(X) 25
|
||||
Returns a string of spaces length X. The expression
|
||||
X is rounded to an integer using CINT.
|
||||
.IP STR$(X)
|
||||
Returns the string representation value of X.
|
||||
.IP STRING$(I,J) 25
|
||||
Returns thes string of length Iwhose characters all
|
||||
have ASCII code J. (or first character when J is a string)
|
||||
.IP TAB(I) 25
|
||||
Spaces to position I on the terminal. If the current
|
||||
print position is already beyond space I,TAB
|
||||
goes to that position on the next line.
|
||||
Space 1 is leftmost position, and the rightmost position
|
||||
is width minus 1. To be used within PRINT statements only.
|
||||
.IP TAN(X) 25
|
||||
Returns the tangent of X in radians. If TAN overflows
|
||||
the "Overflow" message is displayed.
|
||||
.IP VAL(X$) 25
|
||||
Returns the numerical value of string X$.
|
||||
The VAL function strips leading blanks and tabs from the
|
||||
argument string.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES WITH MICROSOFT BASIC
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The following list of Microsoft commands and statements are
|
||||
not recognized by the compiler.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
SPC
|
||||
USR
|
||||
VARPTR
|
||||
AUTO
|
||||
CHAIN
|
||||
CLEAR
|
||||
CLOAD
|
||||
COMMON
|
||||
CONT
|
||||
CSAVE
|
||||
DELETE
|
||||
EDIT
|
||||
ERASE
|
||||
FRE
|
||||
KILL
|
||||
LIST
|
||||
LLIST
|
||||
LOAD
|
||||
LPRINT
|
||||
MERGE
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
NEW
|
||||
NULL
|
||||
RENUM
|
||||
RESUME
|
||||
RUN
|
||||
SAVE
|
||||
WAIT
|
||||
WIDTH LPRINT
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Some statements are in the current implementation not available,
|
||||
but will be soon. These include:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
CALL
|
||||
DEFUSR
|
||||
FIELD
|
||||
GET
|
||||
INKEY
|
||||
INPUT$
|
||||
INSTR$
|
||||
LEFT$
|
||||
LSET
|
||||
RSET
|
||||
PUT
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
APPENDIX B RESERVED WORDS IN BASIC-EM
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The following list of words/symbols/names/identifiers are reserved, which
|
||||
means that they can not be used for variable-names.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
ABS AND ASC AS
|
||||
ATN AUTO BASE CALL
|
||||
CDBL CHAIN CHR CINT
|
||||
CLEAR CLOAD CLOSE COMMON
|
||||
CONT COS CSNG CSAVE
|
||||
CVI CVS CVD DATA
|
||||
DEFINT DEFSNG DEFDBL DEFSTR
|
||||
DEF DELETE DIM EDIT
|
||||
ELSE END EOF ERASE
|
||||
ERROR ERR ERL ELSE
|
||||
EQV EXP FIELD FIX
|
||||
FOR FRE GET GOSUB
|
||||
GOTO HEX IF IMP
|
||||
INKEY INPUT INP INSTR
|
||||
INT KILL LEFT LEN
|
||||
LET LINE LIST LLIST
|
||||
LOAD LOC LOG LPOS
|
||||
LPRINT LSET MERGE MID
|
||||
MKI MKS MKD MOD
|
||||
NAME NEW NEXT NOT
|
||||
NULL ON OCT OPEN
|
||||
OPTION OR OUT PEEK
|
||||
POKE PRINT POS PUT
|
||||
RANDOMIZE READ REM RENUM
|
||||
REN RESTORE RESUME RETURN
|
||||
RIGHT RND RUN SAVE
|
||||
STEP SGN SIN SPACE
|
||||
SPC SQR STOP STRING
|
||||
STR SWAP TAB TAN
|
||||
THEN TO TRON TROFF
|
||||
USING USR VAL VARPTR
|
||||
WAIT WHILE WEND WIDTH
|
||||
WRITE XOR
|
||||
.DE
|
|
@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
|
|||
proto.make
|
||||
ceg.ref
|
||||
ceg.tr
|
|
@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
|
|||
PIC=pic
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
|
||||
../ceg.doc: ceg.tr ceg.ref
|
||||
$(PIC) ceg.tr | $(REFER) -e -p ceg.ref | $(TBL) > $@
|
|
@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
|
|||
%T A Practical Toolkit For Making Compilers
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
%A H. v. Staveren
|
||||
%A E.G. Keizer
|
||||
%A J.W. Stevenson
|
||||
%J Communications of the ACM
|
||||
%V 26
|
||||
%N 9
|
||||
%D September 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T Description of a Machine Architecture for Use with Block Structured Languages
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbuum
|
||||
%A H. v. Staveren
|
||||
%A E.G. Keizer
|
||||
%A J.W. Stevenson
|
||||
%R IR-81
|
||||
%I Dept. Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
%C Amsterdam
|
||||
%D August 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T EM_CODE(3ACK)
|
||||
%A ACK Documentation
|
||||
%I Dept. Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
%C Amsterdam
|
||||
|
||||
%T ACK.OUT(5ACK)
|
||||
%A ACK Documentation
|
||||
%I Dept. Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
%C Amsterdam
|
||||
%K aout
|
||||
|
||||
%T PRINT(3ACK)
|
||||
%A ACK Documentation
|
||||
%I Dept. Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
%C Amsterdam
|
||||
|
||||
%T The C Programming Language
|
||||
%A B.W. Kernighan
|
||||
%A D.M. Ritchie
|
||||
%I Prentice-Hall Inc.
|
||||
%C Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey
|
||||
%D 1978
|
1587
doc/ceg/ceg.tr
1587
doc/ceg/ceg.tr
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load diff
|
@ -1,284 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.TL
|
||||
|
||||
Code Expander
|
||||
.br
|
||||
(proposal)
|
||||
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The \fBcode expander\fR, \fBce\fR, is a program that translates EM-code to
|
||||
objectcode. The main goal is to translate very fast. \fBce\fR is an instance
|
||||
of the EM_CODE(3L)-interface. During execution of \fBce\fR, \fBce\fR will build
|
||||
in core a machine independent objectfile ( NEW A.OUT(5L)). With \fBcv\fR or
|
||||
with routines supplied by the user the machine independent objectcode will
|
||||
be converted to a machine dependent object code. \fBce\fR needs
|
||||
information about the targetmachine (e.g. the opcode's). We divide the
|
||||
information into two parts:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
- The description in assembly instructions of EM-code instructions.
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
- The description in objectcode of assembly instructions.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
With these two tables we can make a \fBcode expander generator\fR which
|
||||
generates a \fBce\fR. It is possible to put the information in one table
|
||||
but that will probably introduce (propable) more bugs in the table. So we
|
||||
divide and conquer. With this approach it is also possible to generate
|
||||
assembly code ( rather yhan objectcode), wich is useful for debugging.
|
||||
There is of course a link between the two tables, the link
|
||||
consist of a restriction on the assembly format. Every assembly
|
||||
instruction must have the following format:
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
INSTR ::= LABEL : MNEMONIC [ OPERAND ( "," OPERAND)* ]
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
\fBCeg\fR uses the following algorithm:
|
||||
.IP \0\0a)
|
||||
The assembly table will be converted to a (C-)routine assemble().
|
||||
assemble() gets as argument a string, the assembler instruction,
|
||||
and can use the MNEMONIC to execute the corresponding action in the
|
||||
assembly table.
|
||||
.IP \0\0b)
|
||||
The routine assemble() can now be used to convert the EM-code table to
|
||||
a set of C-routines, wich together form an instance of the
|
||||
EM_CODE(3L).
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
The EM-instruction table
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
We use the following grammar:
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
center box ;
|
||||
l.
|
||||
TABLE ::= (ROW)*
|
||||
ROW ::= C_instr ( SPECIAL | SIMPLE)
|
||||
SPECIAL ::= ( CONDITION SIMPLE)+ 'default' SIMPLE
|
||||
SIMPLE ::= '==>' ACTIONLIST | '::=' ACTIONLIST
|
||||
ACTIONLIST ::= [ ACTION ( ';' ACTION)* ] '.'
|
||||
ACTION ::= function-call | assembly-instruction
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
An example for the 8086:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
C_lxl
|
||||
$arg1 == 0 ==> "push bp".
|
||||
$arg1 == 1 ==> "push EM_BSIZE(bp)".
|
||||
default ==> "mov cx, $arg1";
|
||||
"mov si, bp";
|
||||
"1: mov si, EM_BSIZE(si);
|
||||
"loop 1b"
|
||||
"push si".
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Some remarks:
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
* The C_instr is a function indentifier in the EM_CODE(3L)-interface.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* CONDITION is a "boolean" C-expression.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* The arguments of an EM-instruction can be used in CONDITION and in assembly
|
||||
instructions. They are referred by $arg\fIi\fR. \fBceg\fR modifies the
|
||||
arguments as follows:
|
||||
.IP \0\0-
|
||||
For local variables at positive offsets it increases this offset by EM_BSIZE
|
||||
.IP \0\0-
|
||||
It makes names en labels unique. The user must supply the formats (see mach.h).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* function-call is allowed to implement e.g. push/pop optimization.
|
||||
For example:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
C_adi
|
||||
$arg1 == 2 ==> combine( "pop ax");
|
||||
combine( "pop bx");
|
||||
"add ax, bx";
|
||||
save( "push ax").
|
||||
default ==> arg_error( "C_adi", $arg1).
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* The C-functions called in the EM-instructions table have to use the routine
|
||||
assemble()/gen?(). "assembler-instr" is in fact assemble( "assembler-instr").
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* \fBceg\fR takes care not only about the conversions of arguments but also
|
||||
about
|
||||
changes between segments. There are situation when one doesn't want
|
||||
conversion of arguments. This can be done by using ::= in stead of ==>.
|
||||
This is usefull when two C_instr are equivalent. For example:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
C_slu ::= C_sli( $arg1)
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* There are EM-CODE instructions wich are machine independent (e.g. C_open()).
|
||||
For these EM_CODE instructions \fBceg\fR will generate \fIdefault\fR-
|
||||
instructions. There is one exception: in the case of C_pro() the tablewriter
|
||||
has to supply a function prolog().
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* Also the EM-pseudoinstructions C_bss_\fIcstp\fR(), C_hol_\fIcstp\fR(),
|
||||
C_con_\fIcstp\fR() and C_rom_\fIcstp\fR can be translated automaticly.
|
||||
\fBceg\fR only has to know how to interpretate string-constants:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
\&..icon $arg2 == 1 ==> gen1( (char) atoi( $arg1))
|
||||
$arg2 == 2 ==> gen2( atoi( $arg1))
|
||||
$arg2 == 4 ==> gen4( atol( $arg1))
|
||||
\&..ucon $arg2 == 1 ==> gen1( (char) atoi( $arg1))
|
||||
$arg2 == 2 ==> gen2( atoi( $arg1))
|
||||
$arg2 == 4 ==> gen4( atol( $arg1))
|
||||
\&..fcon ::= not_implemented( "..fcon")
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
* Still, life can be made easier for the tablewriter; For the routines wich
|
||||
he/she didn't implement \fBceg\fR will generate a default instruction wich
|
||||
generates an error-message. \fBceg\fR seems to generate :
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
C_xxx ::= not_implemented( "C_xxx")
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
The assembly table
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
How to map assembly on objectcode.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Each row in the table consists of two fields, one field for the assembly
|
||||
instruction, the other field for the corresponding objectcode. The tablewriter
|
||||
can use the following primitives to generate code for the machine
|
||||
instructions :
|
||||
.IP "\0\0gen1( b)\0\0:" 17
|
||||
generates one byte in de machine independent objectfile.
|
||||
.IP "\0\0gen2( w)\0\0:" 17
|
||||
generates one word ( = two bytes), the table writer can change the byte
|
||||
order by setting the flag BYTES_REVERSED.
|
||||
.IP "\0\0gen4( l)\0\0:" 17
|
||||
generates two words ( = four bytes), the table writer can change the word
|
||||
order by setting the flag WORDS_REVERSED.
|
||||
.IP "\0\0reloc( n, o, r)\0\0:" 17
|
||||
generates relocation information for a label ( = name + offset +
|
||||
relocationtype).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Besides these primitives the table writer may use his self written
|
||||
C-functions. This allows the table writer e.g. to write functions to set
|
||||
bitfields within a byte.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
There are more or less two methods to encode the assembly instructions:
|
||||
.IP \0\0a)
|
||||
MNEMONIC and OPERAND('s) are encoded independently of each other. This can be
|
||||
done when the target machine has an orthogonal instruction set (e.g. pdp-11).
|
||||
.IP \0\0b)
|
||||
MNEMONIC and OPERAND('s) together determine the opcode. In this case the
|
||||
assembler often uses overloading: one MNEMONIC is used for several
|
||||
different machine-instructions. For example : (8086)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
mov ax, bx
|
||||
.br
|
||||
mov ax, variable
|
||||
.br
|
||||
These instructions have different opcodes.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
As the transformation MNEMONIC-OPCODE is not one to
|
||||
one the table writer must be allowed to put restrictions on the operands.
|
||||
This can be done with type declarations. For example:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
mov dst:REG, src:MEM ==>
|
||||
gen1( 0x8b);
|
||||
modRM( op2.reg, op1);
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
mov dst:REG, src:REG ==>
|
||||
gen1( 0x89);
|
||||
modRM( op2.reg, op1);
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
modRM() is a function written by the tablewriter and is used to encode
|
||||
the operands. This frees the table writer of endless typing.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The table writer has to do the "typechecking" by himself. But typechecking
|
||||
is almost the same as operand decoding. So it's more efficient to do this
|
||||
in one function. We now have all the tools to describe the function
|
||||
assemble().
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
assemble() first calls the function
|
||||
decode_operand() ( by the table writer written), with two arguments: a
|
||||
string ( the operand) and a
|
||||
pointer to a struct. The struct is declared by the table writer and must
|
||||
consist of at least a field called type. ( the other fields in the struct can
|
||||
be used to remember information about the decoded operand.) Now assemble()
|
||||
fires a row wich is selected by mapping the MNEMONIC and the type of the
|
||||
operands.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
In the second field of a row there may be references to other
|
||||
fields in the struct (e.g. op2.reg in the example above).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
We ignored one problem. It's possible when the operands are encoded, that
|
||||
not everything is known. For example $arg\fIi\fR arguments in the
|
||||
EM-instruction table get their value at runtime. This problem is solved by
|
||||
introducing a function eval(). eval() has a string as argument and returns
|
||||
an arith. The string consists of constants and/or $arg\fIi\fR's and the value
|
||||
returned by eval() is the value of the string. To encode the $arg\fIi\fR's
|
||||
in as few bytes as possible the table writer can use the statements %if,
|
||||
%else and %endif. They can be used in the same manner as #if, #else and
|
||||
#endif in C and result in a runtime test. An example :
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
-- Some rows of the assembly table
|
||||
|
||||
mov dst:REG, src:DATA ==>
|
||||
%if sfit( eval( src), 8) /* does the immediate-data fit in 1 byte? */
|
||||
R53( 0x16 , op1.reg);
|
||||
gen1( eval( src));
|
||||
%else
|
||||
R53( 0x17 , op1.reg);
|
||||
gen2( eval( src));
|
||||
%endif
|
||||
.LD
|
||||
|
||||
mov dst:REG, src:REG ==>
|
||||
gen1( 0x8b);
|
||||
modRM( op1.reg, op2);
|
||||
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
-- The corresponding part in the function assemble() :
|
||||
|
||||
case MNEM_mov :
|
||||
decode_operand( arg1, &op1);
|
||||
decode_operand( arg2, &op2);
|
||||
if ( REG( op1.type) && DATA( op2.type)) {
|
||||
printf( "if ( sfit( %s, 8)) {\\\\n", eval( src));
|
||||
R53( 0x16 , op1.reg);
|
||||
printf( "gen1( %s)\\\\n", eval( arg2));
|
||||
printf( "}\\\\nelse {\\\\n");
|
||||
R53( 0x17 , op1.reg);
|
||||
printf( "gen2( %s)\\\\n", eval( arg2));
|
||||
printf( "}\\\\n");
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if ( REG( op1.type) && REG( op2.type)) {
|
||||
gen1( 0x8b);
|
||||
modRM( op1.reg, op2);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
-- Some rows of the right part of the EM-instruction table are translated
|
||||
-- in the following C-functions.
|
||||
|
||||
"mov ax, $arg1" ==>
|
||||
if ( sfit( w, 8)) { /* w is the actual argument of C_xxx( w) */
|
||||
gen1( 176); /* R53() */
|
||||
gen1( w);
|
||||
}
|
||||
else {
|
||||
gen1( 184);
|
||||
gen2( w);
|
||||
}
|
||||
.LD
|
||||
|
||||
"mov ax, bx" ==>
|
||||
gen1( 138);
|
||||
gen1( 99); /* modRM() */
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Restrictions
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.IP \0\01)
|
||||
The EM-instructions C_exc() is not implemented.
|
||||
.IP \0\03)
|
||||
All messages are ignored.
|
|
@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
|
|||
# $Id$
|
||||
|
||||
#PARAMS do not remove this line!
|
||||
|
||||
SRC_DIR = $(SRC_HOME)/doc/ceg
|
||||
|
||||
PIC=pic
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
|
||||
$(TARGET_HOME)/doc/ceg.doc: $(SRC_DIR)/ceg.tr $(SRC_DIR)/ceg.ref
|
||||
$(PIC) $(SRC_DIR)/ceg.tr | $(REFER) -e -p $(SRC_DIR)/ceg.ref | $(TBL) > $@
|
|
@ -1,276 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.TL
|
||||
A prototype Code expander
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A program to be compiled with ACK is first fed into the preprocessor.
|
||||
The output of the preprocessor goes into the appropiate front end,
|
||||
whose job it is to produce EM. The EM code generated is
|
||||
fed into the peephole optimizer, wich scans it with a window of few
|
||||
instructions, replacing certain inefficient code sequences by better
|
||||
ones. Following the peephole optimizer follows a backend wich produces
|
||||
good assembly code. The assembly code goes into the assembler and the objectcode
|
||||
then goes into the loader/linker, the final component in the pipeline.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
For various applications this scheme is too slow. For example for testing
|
||||
programs; In this case the program has to be translated fast and the
|
||||
runtime of the objectcode may be slower. A solution is to build a code
|
||||
expander ( \fBce\fR) wich translates EM code to objectcode. Of course this
|
||||
has to
|
||||
be done automaticly by a code expander generator, but to get some feeling
|
||||
for the problem we started out to build prototypes.
|
||||
We built two types of ce's. One wich tranlated EM to assembly, one
|
||||
wich translated EM to objectcode.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
EM to assembly
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We made one for the 8086 and one for the vax4. These ce's are instances of the
|
||||
EM_CODE(3L)-interface and produce for a single EM instruction a set
|
||||
of assembly instruction wich are semantic equivalent.
|
||||
We implemented in the 8086-ce push/pop-optimalization.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
EM to objectcode
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Instead of producing assembly code we tried to produce vax4-objectcode.
|
||||
During execution of ce, ce builds in core a machine independent
|
||||
objectfile ( NEW A.OUT(5L)) and just before dumping the tables this
|
||||
objectfile is converted to a Berkly 4.2BSD a.out-file. We build two versions;
|
||||
One with static memory allocation and one with dynamic memory allocation.
|
||||
If the first one runs out of memory it will give an error message and stop,
|
||||
the second one will allocate more memory and proceed with producing
|
||||
objectcode.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The C-frontend calls the EM_CODE-interface. So after linking the frontend
|
||||
and the ce we have a pipeline in a program saving a lot of i/o.
|
||||
It is interesting to compare this C-compiler ( called fcemcom) with "cc -c".
|
||||
fcemcom1 (the dynamic variant of fcemcom) is tuned in such a way, that
|
||||
alloc() won't be called.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Compile time
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
fac.c is a small program that produces n! ( see below). foo.c is small program
|
||||
that loops a lot.
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
center, box, tab(:);
|
||||
c | c | c | c | c | c
|
||||
c | c | n | n | n | n.
|
||||
compiler : program : real : user : sys : object size
|
||||
=
|
||||
fcemcom : sort.c : 31.0 : 17.5 : 1.8 : 23824
|
||||
fcemcom1 : : 59.0 : 21.2 : 3.3 :
|
||||
cc -c : : 50.0 : 38.0 : 3.5 : 6788
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcemcom : ed.c : 37.0 : 23.6 : 2.3 : 41744
|
||||
fcemcom1 : : 1.16.0 : 28.3 : 4.6 :
|
||||
cc -c : : 1.19.0 : 54.8 : 4.3 : 11108
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcemcom : cp.c : 4.0 : 2.4 : 0.8 : 4652
|
||||
fcemcom1 : : 9.0 : 3.0 : 1.0 :
|
||||
cc -c : : 8.0 : 5.2 : 1.6 : 1048
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcemcom : uniq.c : 5.0 : 2.5 : 0.8 : 5568
|
||||
fcemcom1 : : 9.0 : 2.9 : 0.8 :
|
||||
cc -c : : 13.0 : 5.4 : 2.0 : 3008
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcemcom : btlgrep.c : 24.0 : 7.2 : 1.4 : 12968
|
||||
fcemcom1 : : 23.0 : 8.1 : 1.2 :
|
||||
cc -c : : 1.20.0 : 15.3 : 3.8 : 2392
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcemcom : fac.c : 1.0 : 0.1 : 0.5 : 216
|
||||
fecmcom1 : : 2.0 : 0.2 : 0.5 :
|
||||
cc -c : : 3.0 : 0.7 : 1.3 : 92
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcemcom : foo.c : 4.0 : 0.2 : 0.5 : 272
|
||||
fcemcom1 : : 11.0 : 0.3 : 0.5 :
|
||||
cc -c : : 7.0 : 0.8 : 1.6 : 108
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Run time
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Is the runtime very bad?
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
tab(:), box, center;
|
||||
c | c | c | c | c
|
||||
c | c | n | n | n.
|
||||
compiler : program : real : user : system
|
||||
=
|
||||
fcem : sort.c : 22.0 : 17.5 : 1.5
|
||||
cc : : 5.0 : 2.4 : 1.1
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcem : btlgrep.c : 1.58.0 : 27.2 : 4.2
|
||||
cc : : 12.0 : 3.6 : 1.1
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcem : foo.c : 1.0 : 0.7 : 0.1
|
||||
cc : : 1.0 : 0.4 : 0.1
|
||||
_
|
||||
fcem : uniq.c : 2.0 : 0.5 : 0.3
|
||||
cc : : 1.0 : 0.1 : 0.2
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
quality object code
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The runtime is very bad so its interesting to have look at the code which is
|
||||
produced by fcemcom and by cc -c. I took a program which computes recursively
|
||||
n!.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
long fac();
|
||||
|
||||
main()
|
||||
{
|
||||
int n;
|
||||
|
||||
scanf( "%D", &n);
|
||||
printf( "fac is %D\\\\n", fac( n));
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
long fac( n)
|
||||
int n;
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( n == 0)
|
||||
return( 1);
|
||||
else
|
||||
return( n * fac( n-1));
|
||||
}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
"cc -c fac.c" produces :
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
fac: tstl 4(ap)
|
||||
bnequ 7f
|
||||
movl $1, r0
|
||||
ret
|
||||
7f: subl3 $1, 4(ap), r0
|
||||
pushl r0
|
||||
call $1, fac
|
||||
movl r0, -4(fp)
|
||||
mull3 -4(fp), 4(ap), r0
|
||||
ret
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
"fcem fac.c fac.o" produces :
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
_fac: 0
|
||||
42: jmp be
|
||||
48: pushl 4(ap)
|
||||
4e: pushl $0
|
||||
54: subl2 (sp)+,(sp)
|
||||
57: tstl (sp)+
|
||||
59: bnequ 61
|
||||
5b: jmp 67
|
||||
61: jmp 79
|
||||
67: pushl $1
|
||||
6d: jmp ba
|
||||
73: jmp b9
|
||||
79: pushl 4(ap)
|
||||
7f: pushl $1
|
||||
85: subl2 (sp)+,(sp)
|
||||
88: calls $0,_fac
|
||||
8f: addl2 $4,sp
|
||||
96: pushl r0
|
||||
98: pushl 4(ap)
|
||||
9e: pushl $4
|
||||
a4: pushl $4
|
||||
aa: jsb .cii
|
||||
b0: mull2 (sp)+,(sp)
|
||||
b3: jmp ba
|
||||
b9: ret
|
||||
ba: movl (sp)+,r0
|
||||
bd: ret
|
||||
be: jmp 48
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Conclusions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
comparing "cc -c" with "fcemcom"
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
center, box, tab(:);
|
||||
c | c s | c | c s
|
||||
^ | c s | ^ | c s
|
||||
^ | c | c | ^ | c | c
|
||||
l | n | n | n | n | n.
|
||||
program : compile time : object size : runtime
|
||||
:_::_
|
||||
: user : sys :: user : sys
|
||||
=
|
||||
sort.c : 0.47 : 0.5 : 3.5 : 7.3 : 1.4
|
||||
_
|
||||
ed.c : 0.46 : 0.5 : 3.8 : : :
|
||||
_
|
||||
cp.c : 0.46 : 0.5 : 4.4 : : :
|
||||
_
|
||||
uniq.c : 0.46 : 0.4 : 1.8 : : :
|
||||
_
|
||||
btlgrep.c : 0.47 : 0.3 : 5.4 : 7.5 : 3.8
|
||||
_
|
||||
fac.c : 0.14 : 0.4 : 2.3 : 1.8 : 1.0
|
||||
_
|
||||
foo.c : 0.25 : 0.3 : 2.5 : 5.0 : 1.5
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The results for fcemcom1 are almost identical; The only thing that changes
|
||||
is that fcemcom1 is 1.2 slower than fcemcom. ( compile time) This is due to
|
||||
to an another datastructure . In the static version we use huge array's for
|
||||
the text- and
|
||||
data-segment, the relocation information, the symboltable and stringarea.
|
||||
In the dynamic version we use linked lists, wich makes it expensive to get
|
||||
and to put a byte on a abritrary memory location. So it is probably better
|
||||
to use realloc(), because in the most cases there will be enough memory.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The quality of the objectcode is very bad. The reason is that the frontend
|
||||
generates bad code and expects the peephole-optimizer to improve the code.
|
||||
This is also one of the main reasons that the runtime is very bad.
|
||||
(e.g. the expensive "cii" with arguments 4 and 4 could be deleted.)
|
||||
So its seems a good
|
||||
idea to put a new peephole-optimizer between the frontend and the ce.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Using the peephole optimizer the ce would produce :
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
_fac: 0
|
||||
pushl 4(ap)
|
||||
tstl (sp)+
|
||||
beqlu 1f
|
||||
jmp 3f
|
||||
1 : pushl $1
|
||||
jmp 2f
|
||||
3 : pushl 4(ap)
|
||||
decl (sp)
|
||||
calls $0,_fac
|
||||
addl2 $4,sp
|
||||
pushl r0
|
||||
pushl 4(ap)
|
||||
mull2 (sp)+,(sp)
|
||||
movl (sp)+,r0
|
||||
2 : ret
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Bruce McKenzy already implemented it and made some improvements in the
|
||||
source code of the ce. The compile-time is two to two and a half times better
|
||||
and the
|
||||
size of the objectcode is two to three times bigger.(comparing with "cc -c")
|
||||
Still we could do better.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Using peephole- and push/pop-optimization ce could produce :
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
_fac: 0
|
||||
tstl 4(ap)
|
||||
beqlu 1f
|
||||
jmp 2f
|
||||
1 : pushl $1
|
||||
jmp 3f
|
||||
2 : decl 4(ap)
|
||||
calls $0,_fac
|
||||
addl2 $4,sp
|
||||
mull3 4(ap), r0, -(sp)
|
||||
movl (sp)+, r0
|
||||
3 : ret
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
prof doesn't cooperate, so no profile information.
|
||||
.PP
|
1864
doc/cg.doc
1864
doc/cg.doc
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load diff
323
doc/cref.doc
323
doc/cref.doc
|
@ -1,323 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.\" $Header$
|
||||
.nr ID 4
|
||||
.de hd
|
||||
'sp 2
|
||||
'tl ''-%-''
|
||||
'sp 3
|
||||
..
|
||||
.de fo
|
||||
'bp
|
||||
..
|
||||
.tr ~
|
||||
. TITLE
|
||||
.de TL
|
||||
.sp 15
|
||||
.ce
|
||||
\\fB\\$1\\fR
|
||||
..
|
||||
. AUTHOR
|
||||
.de AU
|
||||
.sp 15
|
||||
.ce
|
||||
by
|
||||
.sp 2
|
||||
.ce
|
||||
\\$1
|
||||
..
|
||||
. DATE
|
||||
.de DA
|
||||
.sp 3
|
||||
.ce
|
||||
( Dated \\$1 )
|
||||
..
|
||||
. INSTITUTE
|
||||
.de VU
|
||||
.sp 3
|
||||
.ce 4
|
||||
Wiskundig Seminarium
|
||||
Vrije Universteit
|
||||
De Boelelaan 1081
|
||||
Amsterdam
|
||||
..
|
||||
. PARAGRAPH
|
||||
.de PP
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.ti +\n(ID
|
||||
..
|
||||
.nr CH 0 1
|
||||
. CHAPTER
|
||||
.de CH
|
||||
.nr SH 0 1
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.in 0
|
||||
\\fB\\n+(CH.~\\$1\\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
..
|
||||
. SUBCHAPTER
|
||||
.de SH
|
||||
.sp 3
|
||||
.in 0
|
||||
\\fB\\n(CH.\\n+(SH.~\\$1\\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
..
|
||||
. INDENT START
|
||||
.de IS
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.in +\n(ID
|
||||
..
|
||||
. INDENT END
|
||||
.de IE
|
||||
.in -\n(ID
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
..
|
||||
.de PT
|
||||
.ti -\n(ID
|
||||
.ta \n(ID
|
||||
.fc " @
|
||||
"\\$1@"\c
|
||||
.fc
|
||||
..
|
||||
. DOUBLE INDENT START
|
||||
.de DS
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.in +\n(ID
|
||||
.ll -\n(ID
|
||||
..
|
||||
. DOUBLE INDENT END
|
||||
.de DE
|
||||
.ll +\n(ID
|
||||
.in -\n(ID
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
..
|
||||
. EQUATION START
|
||||
.de EQ
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.nf
|
||||
..
|
||||
. EQUATION END
|
||||
.de EN
|
||||
.fi
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
..
|
||||
. ITEM
|
||||
.de IT
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.in 0
|
||||
\\fB~\\$1\\fR
|
||||
.ti +5
|
||||
..
|
||||
.de CS
|
||||
.br
|
||||
~-~\\
|
||||
..
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.fi
|
||||
.TL "Ack-C reference manual"
|
||||
.AU "Ed Keizer"
|
||||
.DA "September 12, 1983"
|
||||
.VU
|
||||
.wh 0 hd
|
||||
.wh 60 fo
|
||||
.CH "Introduction"
|
||||
The C frontend included in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit
|
||||
translates UNIX-V7 C into compact EM code [1].
|
||||
The language accepted is described in [2] and [3].
|
||||
This document describes which implementation dependent choices were
|
||||
made in the Ack-C frontend and
|
||||
some restrictions and additions.
|
||||
.CH "The language"
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Under the same heading as used in [2] we describe the
|
||||
properties of the Ack-C frontend.
|
||||
.IT "2.2 Identifiers"
|
||||
External identifiers are unique up to 7 characters and allow
|
||||
both upper and lower case.
|
||||
.IT "2.3 Keywords"
|
||||
The word \fBvoid\fP is also reserved as a keyword.
|
||||
.IT "2.4.3 Character constants"
|
||||
The ASCII-mapping is used when a character is converted to an
|
||||
integer.
|
||||
.IT "2.4.4 Floating constants"
|
||||
To prevent loss of precision the compiler does not perform
|
||||
floating point constant folding.
|
||||
.IT "2.6 Hardware characteristics"
|
||||
The size of objects of the several arithmetic types and
|
||||
pointers depend on the EM-implementation used.
|
||||
The ranges of the arithmetic types depend on the size used,
|
||||
the C-frontend assumes two's complement representation for the
|
||||
integral types.
|
||||
All sizes are multiples of bytes.
|
||||
The calling program \fIack\fP[4] passes information about the
|
||||
size of the types to the compiler proper.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
However, a few general remarks must be made:
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
.IS
|
||||
.PT (a)
|
||||
The size of pointers is a multiple of
|
||||
(or equal to) the size of an \fIint\fP.
|
||||
.PT (b)
|
||||
The following relations exist for the sizes of the types
|
||||
mentioned:
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ti +5
|
||||
\fIchar<=short<=int<=long\fP
|
||||
.PT (c)
|
||||
Objects of type \fIchar\fP use one 8-bit byte of storage,
|
||||
although several bytes are allocated sometimes.
|
||||
.PT (d)
|
||||
All sizes are in multiples of bytes.
|
||||
.PT (e)
|
||||
Most EM implementations use 4 bytes for floats and 8 bytes
|
||||
for doubles, but exceptions to this rule occur.
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
.IT "4 What's in a name"
|
||||
The type \fIvoid\fP is added.
|
||||
Objects of type void do not exist.
|
||||
Functions declared as returning void, do not return a value at all.
|
||||
.IT "6.1 Characters and integers"
|
||||
Objects of type \fIchar\fP are unsigned and do not cause
|
||||
sign-extension when converted to \fIint\fP.
|
||||
The range of characters values is from 0 to 255.
|
||||
.IT "6.3 Floating and integral"
|
||||
Floating point numbers are truncated towards zero when
|
||||
converted to the integral types.
|
||||
.IT "6.4 Pointers and integers"
|
||||
When a \fIlong\fP is added to or subtracted from a pointer and
|
||||
longs are larger then pointers the \fIlong\fP is converted to an
|
||||
\fIint\fP before the operation is performed.
|
||||
.IT "7.2 Unary operators"
|
||||
It is allowed to cast any expression to the type \fIvoid\fP.
|
||||
.IT "8.2 Type specifiers"
|
||||
One type is added to the type-specifiers:
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.IS
|
||||
void
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
.IT "8.5 Structure and union declarations"
|
||||
The only type allowed for fields is \fIint\fP.
|
||||
Fields with exactly the size of \fIint\fP are signed,
|
||||
all other fields are unsigned.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The size of any single structure must be less then 4096 bytes.
|
||||
.IT "8.6 Initialization"
|
||||
Initialization of structures containing bit fields is not
|
||||
allowed.
|
||||
There is one restriction when using an 'address expression' to initialize
|
||||
an integral variable.
|
||||
The integral variable must have the same size as a pointer.
|
||||
Conversions altering the size of the address expression are not allowed.
|
||||
.IT "9.10 Return statement"
|
||||
Return statements of the form:
|
||||
.IS
|
||||
return ;
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
are the only form of return statement allowed in a function of type
|
||||
function returning void.
|
||||
.IT "10.1 External function definitions"
|
||||
The total amount for storage used for parameters
|
||||
in any function must be less then 4096 bytes.
|
||||
The same holds for the total amount of storage occupied by the
|
||||
automatic variables declared inside any function.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Using formal parameters whose size is smaller the the size of an int
|
||||
is less efficient on several machines.
|
||||
At procedure entry these parameters are converted from integer to the
|
||||
declared type, because the compiler doesn't know where the least
|
||||
significant bytes are stored in the int.
|
||||
.IT "11.2 Scope of externals"
|
||||
Most C compilers are rather lax in enforcing the restriction
|
||||
that only one external definition without the keyword
|
||||
\fIextern\fP is allowed in a program.
|
||||
The Ack-C frontend is very strict in this.
|
||||
The only exception is that declarations of arrays with a
|
||||
missing first array bounds expression are regarded to have an
|
||||
explicit keyword \fIextern\fP.
|
||||
.IT "14.4 Explicit pointer conversions"
|
||||
Pointers may be larger the ints, thus assigning a pointer to an
|
||||
int and back will not always result in the same pointer.
|
||||
The process mentioned above works with integrals
|
||||
of the same size or larger as pointers in all EM implementations
|
||||
having such integrals.
|
||||
When converting pointers to an integral type or vice-versa,
|
||||
the pointers is seen as an unsigned int.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
EM guarantees that any object can be placed at a word boundary,
|
||||
this allows the C-programs to use \fIint\fP pointers
|
||||
as pointers to objects of any type not smaller than an \fIint\fP.
|
||||
.CH "Frontend options"
|
||||
The C-frontend has a few options, these are controlled
|
||||
by flags:
|
||||
.IS
|
||||
.PT -V
|
||||
This flag is followed by a sequence of letters each followed by
|
||||
positive integers. Each letter indicates a
|
||||
certain type, the integer following it specifies the size of
|
||||
objects of that type. One letter indicates the wordsize used.
|
||||
.IS
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
center tab(:);
|
||||
l l16 l l.
|
||||
letter:type:letter:type
|
||||
|
||||
w:wordsize:i:int
|
||||
s:short:l:long
|
||||
f:float:d:double
|
||||
p:pointer::
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
All existing implementations use an integer size equal to the
|
||||
wordsize.
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
The calling program \fIack\fP[4] provides the frontend with
|
||||
this flag, with values depending on the machine used.
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
.PT -l
|
||||
The frontend normally generates code to keep track of the line
|
||||
number and source file name at runtime for debugging purposes.
|
||||
Currently a pointer to a
|
||||
string containing the filename is stored at a fixed place in
|
||||
memory at each function
|
||||
entry and the line number at the start of every expression.
|
||||
At the return from a function these memory locations are not reset to
|
||||
the values they had before the call.
|
||||
Most library routines do not use this feature and thus do not
|
||||
ruin the current line number and filename when called.
|
||||
However, you are really unlucky when your program crashes due
|
||||
to a bug in such a library function, because the line number
|
||||
and filename do not indicate that something went wrong inside
|
||||
the library function.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Providing the flag -l to the frontend tells it not to generate
|
||||
the code updating line number and file name.
|
||||
This is, for example, used when translating the stdio library.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
When the \fIack\fP[4] is called with the -L flag it provides
|
||||
the frontend with this flag.
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
.PT -Xp
|
||||
When this flag is present the frontend generates a call to
|
||||
the function \fBprocentry\fP at each function entry and a
|
||||
call to \fBprocexit\fP at each function exit.
|
||||
Both functions are provided with one parameter,
|
||||
a pointer to a string containing the function name.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
When \fIack\fP is called with the -p flag it provides the
|
||||
frontend with this flag.
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
.CH References
|
||||
.IS
|
||||
.PT [1]
|
||||
A.S. Tanenbaum, Hans van Staveren, Ed Keizer and Johan
|
||||
Stevenson \fIDescription of a machine architecture for use with
|
||||
block structured languages\fP Informatica report IR-81.
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
.PT [2]
|
||||
B.W. Kernighan and D.M. Ritchie, \fIThe C Programming
|
||||
language\fP, Prentice-Hall, 1978
|
||||
.PT [3]
|
||||
D.M. Ritchie, \fIC Reference Manual\fP
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.PT [4]
|
||||
UNIX manual ack(I).
|
629
doc/crefman.doc
629
doc/crefman.doc
|
@ -1,629 +0,0 @@
|
|||
\." $Id$
|
||||
.\" eqn crefman.doc | troff -ms
|
||||
.EQ
|
||||
delim $$
|
||||
.EN
|
||||
.RP
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
ACK/CEM Compiler
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Reference Manual
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
Erik H. Baalbergen
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Department of Mathematics and Computer Science
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Amsterdam
|
||||
The Netherlands
|
||||
.AB no
|
||||
.AE
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
C Language
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This section discusses the extensions to and deviations from the C language,
|
||||
as described in [1].
|
||||
The issues are numbered according to the reference manual.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.2 Identifiers
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Upper and lower case letters are different.
|
||||
The number of significant letters
|
||||
is 32 by default, but may be set to another value using the \fB\-M\fP option.
|
||||
The identifier length should be set according to the rest of the compilation
|
||||
programs.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.3 Keywords
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f(CWasm\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The keyword \f(CWasm\fP
|
||||
is recognized.
|
||||
However, the statement
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
asm(string);
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
is skipped, while a warning is given.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f(CWenum\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The \f(CWenum\fP keyword is recognized and interpreted.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f(CWentry\fP, \f(CWfortran\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The words \f(CWentry\fP and \f(CWfortran\fP
|
||||
are reserved under the restricted option.
|
||||
The words are not interpreted by the compiler.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.4.1 Integer Constants
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The type of an integer constant is the first of the corresponding list
|
||||
in which its value can be represented. Decimal: \f(CWint, long, unsigned long\fP;
|
||||
octal or hexadecimal: \f(CWint, unsigned, long, unsigned long\fP; suffixed by
|
||||
the letter L or l: \f(CWlong, unsigned long\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.4.3 Character Constants
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A character constant is a sequence of 1 up to \f(CWsizeof(int)\fP characters
|
||||
enclosed in single quotes.
|
||||
The value of a character constant '$c sub 1 c sub 2 ... c sub n$'
|
||||
is $d sub n + M \(mu d sub {n - 1} + ... + M sup {n - 1} \(mu d sub 2 + M sup n \(mu d sub 1$,
|
||||
where M is 1 + maximum unsigned number representable in an \f(CWunsigned char\fP,
|
||||
and $d sub i$ is the signed value (ASCII)
|
||||
of character $c sub i$.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.4.4 Floating Constants
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The compiler does not support compile-time floating point arithmetic.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.6 Hardware characteristics
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The compiler is capable of producing EM code for machines with the following
|
||||
properties
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
a \f(CWchar\fP is 8 bits
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of \f(CWint\fP is equal to the word size
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of \f(CWshort\fP may not exceed the size of \f(CWint\fP
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of \f(CWint\fP may not exceed the size of \f(CWlong\fP
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of pointers is equal to the size of either \f(CWshort\fP, \f(CWint\fP
|
||||
or \f(CWlong\fP
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
4 What's in a name?
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f(CWchar\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Objects of type \f(CWchar\fP are taken to be signed.
|
||||
The combination \f(CWunsigned char\fP is legal.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f(CWunsigned\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The type combinations \f(CWunsigned char\fP, \f(CWunsigned short\fP and
|
||||
\f(CWunsigned long\fP are supported.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f(CWenum\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The data type \f(CWenum\fP is implemented as described
|
||||
in \fIRecent Changes to C\fP (see appendix A).
|
||||
.I Cem
|
||||
treats enumeration variables as if they were \f(CWint\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f(CWvoid\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Type \f(CWvoid\fP is implemented.
|
||||
The type specifies an empty set of values, which takes no storage space.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\fRFundamental types\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The names of the fundamental types can be redefined by the user, using
|
||||
\f(CWtypedef\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7 Expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The order of evaluation of expressions depends on the complexity of the
|
||||
subexpressions.
|
||||
In case of commutative operations, the most complex subexpression is
|
||||
evaluated first.
|
||||
Parameter lists are evaluated from right to left.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7.2 Unary operators
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The type of a \f(CWsizeof\fP expression is \f(CWunsigned int\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7.13 Conditional operator
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Both the second and the third expression in a conditional expression may
|
||||
include assignment operators.
|
||||
They may be structs or unions.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7.14 Assignment operators
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Structures may be assigned, passed as arguments to functions, and returned
|
||||
by functions.
|
||||
The types of operands taking part must be the same.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
8.2 Type specifiers
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The combinations \f(CWunsigned char\fP, \f(CWunsigned short\fP
|
||||
and \f(CWunsigned long\fP are implemented.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
8.5 Structure and union declarations
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Fields of any integral type, either signed or unsigned,
|
||||
are supported, as long as the type fits in a word on the target machine.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Fields are left adjusted by default; the first field is put into the left
|
||||
part of a word, the next one on the right side of the first one, etc.
|
||||
The \f(CW-Vr\fP option in the call of the compiler
|
||||
causes fields to be right adjusted within a machine word.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The tags of structs and unions occupy a different name space from that of
|
||||
variables and that of member names.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
9.7 Switch statement
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The type of \fIexpression\fP in
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
\f(CWswitch (\fP\fIexpression\fP\f(CW)\fP \fIstatement\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
must be integral.
|
||||
A warning is given under the restricted option if the type is \f(CWlong\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
10 External definitions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
See [4] for a discussion on this complicated issue.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
10.1 External function definitions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Structures may be passed as arguments to functions, and returned
|
||||
by functions.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
11.1 Lexical scope
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Typedef names may be redeclared like any other variable name; the ice mentioned
|
||||
in \(sc11.1 is walked correctly.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12 Compiler control lines
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Lines which do not occur within comment, and with \f(CW#\fP as first
|
||||
character, are interpreted as compiler control line.
|
||||
There may be an arbitrary number of spaces, tabs and comments (collectively
|
||||
referred as \fIwhite space\fP) following the \f(CW#\fP.
|
||||
Comments may contain newline characters.
|
||||
Control lines with only white space between the \f(CW#\fP and the line separator
|
||||
are skipped.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The #\f(CWinclude\fP, #\f(CWifdef\fP, #\f(CWifndef\fP, #\f(CWundef\fP, #\f(CWelse\fP and
|
||||
#\f(CWendif\fP control lines and line directives consist of a fixed number of
|
||||
arguments.
|
||||
The list of arguments may be followed an arbitrary sequence of characters,
|
||||
in which comment is interpreted as such.
|
||||
(I.e., the text between \f(CW/*\fP and \f(CW*/\fP is skipped, regardless of
|
||||
newlines; note that commented-out lines beginning with \f(CW#\fP are not
|
||||
considered to be control lines.)
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.1 Token replacement
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The replacement text of macros is taken to be a string of characters, in which
|
||||
an identifier may stand for a formal parameter, and in which comment is
|
||||
interpreted as such.
|
||||
Comments and newline characters, preceeded by a backslash, in the replacement
|
||||
text are replaced by a space character.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The actual parameters of a macro are considered tokens and are
|
||||
balanced with regard to \f(CW()\fP, \f(CW{}\fP and \f(CW[]\fP.
|
||||
This prevents the use of macros like
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
CTL([)
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Formal parameters of a macro must have unique names within the formal-parameter
|
||||
list of that macro.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A message is given at the definition of a macro if the macro has
|
||||
already been #\f(CWdefined\fP, while the number of formal parameters differ or
|
||||
the replacement texts are not equal (apart from leading and trailing
|
||||
white space).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Recursive use of macros is detected by the compiler.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Standard #\f(CWdefined\fP macros are
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
\f(CW__FILE__\fP name of current input file as string constant
|
||||
\f(CW__DATE__\fP curent date as string constant; e.g. \f(CW"Tue Wed 2 14:45:23 1986"\fP
|
||||
\f(CW__LINE__\fP current line number as an integer
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
No message is given if \fIidentifier\fP is not known in
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
#undef \fIidentifier\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.2 File inclusion
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A newline character is appended to each file which is included.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.3 Conditional compilation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The #\f(CWif\fP, #\f(CWifdef\fP and #\f(CWifndef\fP control lines may be followed
|
||||
by an arbitrary number of
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
#elif \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
control lines, before the corresponding #\f(CWelse\fP or #\f(CWendif\fP
|
||||
is encountered.
|
||||
The construct
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
#elif \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
some text
|
||||
#endif /* corresponding to #elif */
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
is equivalent to
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
#else
|
||||
#if \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
some text
|
||||
#endif /* corresponding to #if */
|
||||
#endif /* corresponding to #else */
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The \fIconstant-expression\fP in #\f(CWif\fP and #\f(CWelif\fP control lines
|
||||
may contain the construction
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
defined(\fIidentifier\fP)
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
which is replaced by \f(CW1\fP, if \fIidentifier\fP has been #\f(CWdefined\fP,
|
||||
and by \f(CW0\fP, if not.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Comments in skipped lines are interpreted as such.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.4 Line control
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Line directives may occur in the following forms:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
#line \fIconstant\fP
|
||||
#line \fIconstant\fP "\fIfilename\fP"
|
||||
#\fIconstant\fP
|
||||
#\fIconstant\fP "\fIfilename\fP"
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Note that \fIfilename\fP is enclosed in double quotes.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
14.2 Functions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If a pointer to a function is called, the function the pointer points to
|
||||
is called instead.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
15 Constant expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The compiler distinguishes the following types of integral constant expressions
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
field-width specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
case-entry specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
array-size specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
global variable initialization value
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
enum-value specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
truth value in \f(CW#if\fP control line
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Constant integral expressions are compile-time evaluated while an effort
|
||||
is made to report overflow.
|
||||
Constant floating expressions are not compile-time evaluated.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Compiler flags
|
||||
.IP \fB\-C\fR
|
||||
Run the preprocessor stand-alone while maintaining the comments.
|
||||
Line directives are produced whenever needed.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP=\fIstring-of-characters\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Define \fIname\fR as macro with \fIstring-of-characters\fR as
|
||||
replacement text.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Equal to \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP\fB=1\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-E\fP
|
||||
Run the preprocessor stand alone, i.e.,
|
||||
list the sequence of input tokens and delete any comments.
|
||||
Line directives are produced whenever needed.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-I\fIpath\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Prepend \fIpath\fR to the list of include directories.
|
||||
To put the directories "include", "sys/h" and "util/h" into the
|
||||
include directory list in that order, the user has to specify
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
-Iinclude -Isys/h -Iutil/h
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
An empty \fIpath\fP causes the standard include
|
||||
directory (usually \f(CW/usr/include\fP) to be forgotten.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-M\fP\fIn\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Set maximum significant identifier length to \fIn\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-n\fP
|
||||
Suppress EM register messages.
|
||||
The user-declared variables are not stored into registers on the target
|
||||
machine.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-p\fP
|
||||
Generate the EM \fBfil\fP and \fBlin\fP instructions in order to enable
|
||||
an interpreter to keep track of the current location in the source code.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-P\fP
|
||||
Equivalent with \fB\-E\fP, but without line directives.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-R\fP
|
||||
Interpret the input as restricted C (according to the language as
|
||||
described in [1]).
|
||||
.IP \fB\-T\fP\fIpath\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Create temporary files, if necessary, in directory \fIpath\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-U\fP\fIname\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Get rid of the compiler-predefined macro \fIname\fP, i.e.,
|
||||
consider
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
#undef \fIname\fP
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
to appear in the beginning of the file.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-V\fIcm\fR.\fIn\fR,\ \fB\-V\fIcm\fR.\fIncm\fR.\fIn\fR\ ...
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Set the size and alignment requirements.
|
||||
The letter \fIc\fR indicates the simple type, which is one of
|
||||
\fBs\fR(short), \fBi\fR(int), \fBl\fR(long), \fBf\fR(float), \fBd\fR(double)
|
||||
or \fBp\fR(pointer).
|
||||
If \fIc\fR is \fBS\fP or \fBU\fP, then \fIn\fP is taken to be the initial
|
||||
alignment of structs or unions, respectively.
|
||||
The effective alignment of a struct or union is the least common multiple
|
||||
of the initial struct/union alignment and the alignments of its members.
|
||||
The \fIm\fR parameter can be used to specify the length of the type (in bytes)
|
||||
and the \fIn\fR parameter for the alignment of that type.
|
||||
Absence of \fIm\fR or \fIn\fR causes the default value to be retained.
|
||||
To specify that the bitfields should be right adjusted instead of the
|
||||
default left adjustment, specify \fBr\fR as \fIc\fR parameter.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-w\fR
|
||||
Suppress warning messages
|
||||
.IP \fB\-\-\fIcharacter\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Set debug-flag \fIcharacter\fP.
|
||||
This enables some special features offered by a debug and develop version of
|
||||
the compiler.
|
||||
Some particular flags may be recognized, others may have surprising effects.
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP \fBd\fP
|
||||
Generate a dependency graph, reflecting the calling structure of functions.
|
||||
Lines of the form
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
DFA: \fIcalling-function\fP: \fIcalled-function\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
are generated whenever a function call is encountered.
|
||||
.IP \fBf\fP
|
||||
Dump whole identifier table, including macros and reserved words.
|
||||
.IP \fBh\fP
|
||||
Supply hash-table statistics.
|
||||
.IP \fBi\fP
|
||||
Print names of included files.
|
||||
.IP \fBm\fP
|
||||
Supply statistics concerning the memory allocation.
|
||||
.IP \fBt\fP
|
||||
Dump table of identifiers.
|
||||
.IP \fBu\fP
|
||||
Generate extra statistics concerning the predefined types and identifiers.
|
||||
Works in combination with \fBf\fP or \fBt\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fBx\fP
|
||||
Print expression trees in human-readable format.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
References
|
||||
.IP [1]
|
||||
Brian W. Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
The C Programming Language
|
||||
.R
|
||||
.IP [2]
|
||||
L. Rosler,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
Draft Proposed Standard - Programming Language C,
|
||||
.R
|
||||
ANSI X3J11 Language Subcommittee
|
||||
.IP [3]
|
||||
Erik H. Baalbergen, Dick Grune, Maarten Waage,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
The CEM Compiler,
|
||||
.R
|
||||
Informatica Manual IM-4, Dept. of Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije
|
||||
Universiteit, Amsterdam, The Netherlands
|
||||
.IP [4]
|
||||
Erik H. Baalbergen,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
Modeling global declarations in C,
|
||||
.R
|
||||
internal paper
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Appendix A - Enumeration Type
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The syntax is
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.I enum-specifier :
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\&\f(CWenum\fP { \fIenum-list\fP }
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\f(CWenum\fP \fIidentifier\fP { \fIenum-list\fP }
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\f(CWenum\fP \fIidentifier\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
\&\fIenum-list\fP :
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\&\fIenumerator\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\fIenum-list\fP , \fIenumerator\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
\&\fIenumerator\fP :
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\&\fIidentifier\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\fIidentifier\fP = \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
The identifier has the same role as the structure tag in a struct specification.
|
||||
It names a particular enumeration type.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The identifiers in the enum-list are declared as constants, and may appear
|
||||
whenever constants are required.
|
||||
If no enumerators with
|
||||
.B =
|
||||
appear, then the values of the constants begin at 0 and increase by 1 as the
|
||||
declaration is read from left to right.
|
||||
An enumerator with
|
||||
.B =
|
||||
gives the associated identifier the value indicated; subsequent identifiers
|
||||
continue the progression from the assigned value.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Enumeration tags and constants must all be distinct, and, unlike structure
|
||||
tags and members, are drawn from the same set as ordinary identifiers.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Objects of a given enumeration type are regarded as having a type distinct
|
||||
from objects of all other types.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Appendix B: C grammar in LL(1) form
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The \fBbold-faced\fP and \fIitalicized\fP tokens represent terminal symbols.
|
||||
.vs 16
|
||||
.nf
|
||||
\fBexternal definitions\fP
|
||||
program: external-definition*
|
||||
external-definition: ext-decl-specifiers [declarator [function | non-function] | '\fB;\fP'] | asm-statement
|
||||
ext-decl-specifiers: decl-specifiers?
|
||||
non-function: initializer? ['\fB,\fP' init-declarator]* '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
function: declaration* compound-statement
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
\fBdeclarations\fP
|
||||
declaration: decl-specifiers init-declarator-list? '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
decl-specifiers: other-specifier+ [single-type-specifier other-specifier*]? | single-type-specifier other-specifier*
|
||||
other-specifier: \fBauto\fP | \fBstatic\fP | \fBextern\fP | \fBtypedef\fP | \fBregister\fP | \fBshort\fP | \fBlong\fP | \fBunsigned\fP
|
||||
type-specifier: decl-specifiers
|
||||
single-type-specifier: \fItype-identifier\fP | struct-or-union-specifier | enum-specifier
|
||||
init-declarator-list: init-declarator ['\fB,\fP' init-declarator]*
|
||||
init-declarator: declarator initializer?
|
||||
declarator: primary-declarator ['\fB(\fP' formal-list ? '\fB)\fP' | arrayer]* | '\fB*\fP' declarator
|
||||
primary-declarator: identifier | '\fB(\fP' declarator '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
arrayer: '\fB[\fP' constant-expression? '\fB]\fP'
|
||||
formal-list: formal ['\fB,\fP' formal]*
|
||||
formal: identifier
|
||||
enum-specifier: \fBenum\fP [enumerator-pack | identifier enumerator-pack?]
|
||||
enumerator-pack: '\fB{\fP' enumerator ['\fB,\fP' enumerator]* '\fB,\fP'? '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
enumerator: identifier ['\fB=\fP' constant-expression]?
|
||||
struct-or-union-specifier: [ \fBstruct\fP | \fBunion\fP] [ struct-declaration-pack | identifier struct-declaration-pack?]
|
||||
struct-declaration-pack: '\fB{\fP' struct-declaration+ '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
struct-declaration: type-specifier struct-declarator-list '\fB;\fP'?
|
||||
struct-declarator-list: struct-declarator ['\fB,\fP' struct-declarator]*
|
||||
struct-declarator: declarator bit-expression? | bit-expression
|
||||
bit-expression: '\fB:\fP' constant-expression
|
||||
initializer: '\fB=\fP'? initial-value
|
||||
cast: '\fB(\fP' type-specifier abstract-declarator '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
abstract-declarator: primary-abstract-declarator ['\fB(\fP' '\fB)\fP' | arrayer]* | '\fB*\fP' abstract-declarator
|
||||
primary-abstract-declarator: ['\fB(\fP' abstract-declarator '\fB)\fP']?
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
\fBstatements\fP
|
||||
statement:
|
||||
expression-statement
|
||||
| label '\fB:\fP' statement
|
||||
| compound-statement
|
||||
| if-statement
|
||||
| while-statement
|
||||
| do-statement
|
||||
| for-statement
|
||||
| switch-statement
|
||||
| case-statement
|
||||
| default-statement
|
||||
| break-statement
|
||||
| continue-statement
|
||||
| return-statement
|
||||
| jump
|
||||
| '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
| asm-statement
|
||||
;
|
||||
expression-statement: expression '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
label: identifier
|
||||
if-statement: \fBif\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement [\fBelse\fP statement]?
|
||||
while-statement: \fBwhile\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement
|
||||
do-statement: \fBdo\fP statement \fBwhile\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
for-statement: \fBfor\fP '\fB(\fP' expression? '\fB;\fP' expression? '\fB;\fP' expression? '\fB)\fP' statement
|
||||
switch-statement: \fBswitch\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement
|
||||
case-statement: \fBcase\fP constant-expression '\fB:\fP' statement
|
||||
default-statement: \fBdefault\fP '\fB:\fP' statement
|
||||
break-statement: \fBbreak\fP '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
continue-statement: \fBcontinue\fP '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
return-statement: \fBreturn\fP expression? '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
jump: \fBgoto\fP identifier '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
compound-statement: '\fB{\fP' declaration* statement* '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
asm-statement: \fBasm\fP '\fB(\fP' \fIstring\fP '\fB)\fP' '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
\fBexpressions\fP
|
||||
initial-value: assignment-expression | initial-value-pack
|
||||
initial-value-pack: '\fB{\fP' initial-value-list '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
initial-value-list: initial-value ['\fB,\fP' initial-value]* '\fB,\fP'?
|
||||
primary: \fIidentifier\fP | constant | \fIstring\fP | '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
secundary: primary [index-pack | parameter-pack | selection]*
|
||||
index-pack: '\fB[\fP' expression '\fB]\fP'
|
||||
parameter-pack: '\fB(\fP' parameter-list? '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
selection: ['\fB.\fP' | '\fB\->\fP'] identifier
|
||||
parameter-list: assignment-expression ['\fB,\fP' assignment-expression]*
|
||||
postfixed: secundary postop?
|
||||
unary: cast unary | postfixed | unop unary | size-of
|
||||
size-of: \fBsizeof\fP [cast | unary]
|
||||
binary-expression: unary [binop binary-expression]*
|
||||
conditional-expression: binary-expression ['\fB?\fP' expression '\fB:\fP' assignment-expression]?
|
||||
assignment-expression: conditional-expression [asgnop assignment-expression]?
|
||||
expression: assignment-expression ['\fB,\fP' assignment-expression]*
|
||||
unop: '\fB*\fP' | '\fB&\fP' | '\fB\-\fP' | '\fB!\fP' | '\fB~ \fP' | '\fB++\fP' | '\fB\-\-\fP'
|
||||
postop: '\fB++\fP' | '\fB\-\-\fP'
|
||||
multop: '\fB*\fP' | '\fB/\fP' | '\fB%\fP'
|
||||
addop: '\fB+\fP' | '\fB\-\fP'
|
||||
shiftop: '\fB<<\fP' | '\fB>>\fP'
|
||||
relop: '\fB<\fP' | '\fB>\fP' | '\fB<=\fP' | '\fB>=\fP'
|
||||
eqop: '\fB==\fP' | '\fB!=\fP'
|
||||
arithop: multop | addop | shiftop | '\fB&\fP' | '\fB^ \fP' | '\fB|\fP'
|
||||
binop: arithop | relop | eqop | '\fB&&\fP' | '\fB||\fP'
|
||||
asgnop: '\fB=\fP' | '\fB+\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB\-\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB*\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB/\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB%\fP' '\fB=\fP'
|
||||
| '\fB<<\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB>>\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB&\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB^ \fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB|\fP' '\fB=\fP'
|
||||
| '\fB+=\fP' | '\fB\-=\fP' | '\fB*=\fP' | '\fB/=\fP' | '\fB%=\fP'
|
||||
| '\fB<<=\fP' | '\fB>>=\fP' | '\fB&=\fP' | '\fB^=\fP' | '\fB|=\fP'
|
||||
constant: \fIinteger\fP | \fIfloating\fP
|
||||
constant-expression: assignment-expression
|
||||
identifier: \fIidentifier\fP | \fItype-identifier\fP
|
||||
.fi
|
|
@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
|
|||
proto.make
|
||||
bo
|
||||
ca
|
||||
cf
|
||||
cj
|
||||
cs
|
||||
ic
|
||||
il
|
||||
intro
|
||||
lv
|
||||
ov
|
||||
ra
|
||||
refs.gen
|
||||
refs.opt
|
||||
refs.stat
|
||||
sp
|
||||
sr
|
||||
ud
|
|
@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
|
|||
REFS=-p refs.opt -p refs.stat -p refs.gen
|
||||
INTRO=intro/intro?
|
||||
OV=ov/ov?
|
||||
IC=ic/ic?
|
||||
CF=cf/cf?
|
||||
IL=il/il?
|
||||
SR=sr/sr?
|
||||
CS=cs/cs?
|
||||
SP=sp/sp?
|
||||
UD=ud/ud?
|
||||
LV=lv/lv?
|
||||
CJ=cj/cj?
|
||||
BO=bo/bo?
|
||||
RA=ra/ra?
|
||||
CA=ca/ca?
|
||||
EGO=$(INTRO) $(OV) $(IC) $(CF) $(IL) $(SR) $(CS) $(SP) $(CJ) $(BO) \
|
||||
$(UD) $(LV) $(RA) $(CA)
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
TROFF=troff
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
TARGET=-Tlp
|
||||
|
||||
../ego.doc: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(EGO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(EGO) intro/tail | $(TBL) > ../ego.doc
|
||||
|
||||
ego.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(EGO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(EGO) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > ego.f
|
||||
intro.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(INTRO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(INTRO) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > intro.f
|
||||
ov.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(OV)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(OV) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > ov.f
|
||||
ic.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(IC)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(IC) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > ic.f
|
||||
cf.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(CF)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(CF) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > cf.f
|
||||
il.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(IL)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(IL) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > il.f
|
||||
sr.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(SR)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(SR) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > sr.f
|
||||
cs.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(CS)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(CS) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > cs.f
|
||||
sp.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(SP)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(SP) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > sp.f
|
||||
cj.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(CJ)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(CJ) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > cj.f
|
||||
bo.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(BO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(BO) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > bo.f
|
||||
ud.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(UD)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(UD) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > ud.f
|
||||
lv.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(LV)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(LV) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > lv.f
|
||||
ra.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(RA)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(RA) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > ra.f
|
||||
ca.f: refs.opt refs.stat refs.gen intro/head intro/tail $(CA)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(CA) intro/tail | $(TBL) | $(TROFF) $(TARGET) -ms > ca.f
|
|
@ -1 +0,0 @@
|
|||
bo1
|
162
doc/ego/bo/bo1
162
doc/ego/bo/bo1
|
@ -1,162 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Branch Optimization
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Branch Optimization phase (BO) performs two related
|
||||
(branch) optimizations.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Fusion of basic blocks
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If two basic blocks B1 and B2 have the following properties:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
SUCC(B1) = {B2}
|
||||
PRED(B2) = {B1}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
then B1 and B2 can be combined into one basic block.
|
||||
If B1 ends in an unconditional jump to the beginning of B2, this
|
||||
jump can be eliminated,
|
||||
hence saving a little execution time and object code size.
|
||||
This technique can be used to eliminate some deficiencies
|
||||
introduced by the front ends (for example, the "C" front end
|
||||
translates switch statements inefficiently due to its one pass nature).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
While-loop optimization
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The straightforward way to translate a while loop is to
|
||||
put the test for loop termination at the beginning of the loop.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
while cond loop \kyLAB1: \kxTest cond
|
||||
body of the loop --->\h'|\nxu'Branch On False To LAB2
|
||||
end loop\h'|\nxu'code for body of loop
|
||||
\h'|\nxu'Branch To LAB1
|
||||
\h'|\nyu'LAB2:
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 10.1 Example of Branch Optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If the condition fails at the Nth iteration, the following code
|
||||
gets executed (dynamically):
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l l.
|
||||
N * conditional branch (which fails N-1 times)
|
||||
N-1 * unconditional branch
|
||||
N-1 * body of the loop
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
An alternative translation is:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Branch To LAB2
|
||||
LAB1:
|
||||
code for body of loop
|
||||
LAB2:
|
||||
Test cond
|
||||
Branch On True To LAB1
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
This translation results in the following profile:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l l.
|
||||
N * conditional branch (which succeeds N-1 times)
|
||||
1 * unconditional branch
|
||||
N-1 * body of the loop
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
So the second translation will be significantly faster if N >> 2.
|
||||
If N=2, execution time will be slightly increased.
|
||||
On the average, the program will be speeded up.
|
||||
Note that the code sizes of the two translations will be the same.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The basic block fusion technique is implemented
|
||||
by traversing the control flow graph of a procedure,
|
||||
looking for basic blocks B with only one successor (S).
|
||||
If one is found, it is checked if S has only one predecessor
|
||||
(which has to be B).
|
||||
If so, the two basic blocks can in principle be combined.
|
||||
However, as one basic block will have to be moved,
|
||||
the textual order of the basic blocks will be altered.
|
||||
This reordering causes severe problems in the presence
|
||||
of conditional jumps.
|
||||
For example, if S ends in a conditional branch,
|
||||
the basic block that comes textually next to S must stay
|
||||
in that position.
|
||||
So the transformation in Fig. 10.2 is illegal.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l l l l.
|
||||
LAB1: S1 LAB1: S1
|
||||
BRA LAB2 S2
|
||||
... --> BEQ LAB3
|
||||
LAB2: S2 ...
|
||||
BEQ LAB3 S3
|
||||
S3
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 10.2 An illegal transformation of Branch Optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If B is moved towards S the same problem occurs if the block before B
|
||||
ends in a conditional jump.
|
||||
The problem could be solved by adding one extra branch,
|
||||
but this would reduce the gains of the optimization to zero.
|
||||
Hence the optimization will only be done if the block that
|
||||
follows S (in the textual order) is not a successor of S.
|
||||
This condition assures that S does not end in a conditional branch.
|
||||
The condition always holds for the code generated by the "C"
|
||||
front end for a switch statement.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After the transformation has been performed,
|
||||
some attributes of the basic blocks involved (such as successor and
|
||||
predecessor sets and immediate dominator) must be recomputed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The while-loop technique is applied to one loop at a time.
|
||||
The list of basic blocks of the loop is traversed to find
|
||||
a block B that satisfies the following conditions:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
the textually next block to B is not part of the loop
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
the last instruction of B is an unconditional branch;
|
||||
hence B has only one successor, say S
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
the textually next block of B is a successor of S
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
the last instruction of S is a conditional branch
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If such a block B is found, the control flow graph is changed
|
||||
as depicted in Fig. 10.3.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
| |
|
||||
| v
|
||||
v |
|
||||
|-----<------| ----->-----|
|
||||
____|____ | |
|
||||
| | | |-------| |
|
||||
| S1 | | | v |
|
||||
| Bcc | | | .... |
|
||||
|--| | | | |
|
||||
| --------- | | ----|---- |
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
| .... ^ | | S2 | |
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
| --------- | | | | |
|
||||
v | | | ^ --------- |
|
||||
| | S2 | | | | |
|
||||
| | BRA | | | |-----<-----
|
||||
| | | | | v
|
||||
| --------- | | ____|____
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
| ------>------ | | S1 |
|
||||
| | | Bnn |
|
||||
|-------| | | |
|
||||
| | ----|----
|
||||
v | |
|
||||
|----<--|
|
||||
|
|
||||
v
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 10.3 Transformation of the CFG by Branch Optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
|
@ -1 +0,0 @@
|
|||
ca1
|
|
@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Compact assembly generation
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Compact Assembly generation phase" (CA) transforms the
|
||||
intermediate code of the optimizer into EM code in
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language (CAL) format.
|
||||
In the intermediate code, all program entities
|
||||
(such as procedures, labels, global variables)
|
||||
are denoted by a unique identifying number (see 3.5).
|
||||
In the CAL output of the optimizer these numbers have to
|
||||
be replaced by normal identifiers (strings).
|
||||
The original identifiers of the input program are used whenever possible.
|
||||
Recall that the IC phase generates two files that can be
|
||||
used to map unique identifying numbers to procedure names and
|
||||
global variable names.
|
||||
For instruction labels CA always generates new names.
|
||||
The reasons for doing so are:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
instruction labels are only visible inside one procedure, so they can
|
||||
not be referenced in other modules
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the names are not very suggestive anyway, as they must be integer numbers
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the optimizer considerably changes the control structure of the program,
|
||||
so there is really no one to one mapping of instruction labels in
|
||||
the input and the output program.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
As the optimizer combines all input modules into one module,
|
||||
visibility problems may occur.
|
||||
Two modules M1 and M2 can both define an identifier X (provided that
|
||||
X is not externally visible in any of these modules).
|
||||
If M1 and M2 are combined into one module M, two distinct
|
||||
entities with the same name would exist in M, which
|
||||
is not allowed.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
tanenbaum machine architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.1.4.3]
|
||||
In these cases, CA invents a new unique name for one of the entities.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
CA first reads the files containing the procedure and global variable names
|
||||
and stores the names in two tables.
|
||||
It scans these tables to make sure that all names are different.
|
||||
Subsequently it reads the EM text, one procedure at a time,
|
||||
and outputs it in CAL format.
|
||||
The major part of the code that does the latter transformation
|
||||
is adapted from the EM Peephole Optimizer.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The main problem of the implementation of CA is to
|
||||
assure that the visibility rules are obeyed.
|
||||
If an identifier must be externally visible (i.e.
|
||||
it was externally visible in the input program)
|
||||
and the identifier is defined (in the output program) before
|
||||
being referenced,
|
||||
an EXA or EXP pseudo must be generated for it.
|
||||
(Note that the optimizer may change the order of definitions and
|
||||
references, so some pseudos may be needed that were not
|
||||
present in the input program).
|
||||
On the other hand, an identifier may be only internally visible.
|
||||
If such an identifier is referenced before being defined,
|
||||
an INA or INP pseudo must be emitted prior to its first reference.
|
|
@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
|
|||
cf1
|
||||
cf2
|
||||
cf3
|
||||
cf4
|
||||
cf5
|
||||
cf6
|
|
@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
The Control Flow Phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the previous chapter we described the intermediate
|
||||
code of the global optimizer.
|
||||
We also specified which part of this code
|
||||
was constructed by the IC phase of the optimizer.
|
||||
The Control Flow Phase (\fICF\fR) does
|
||||
the remainder of the job,
|
||||
i.e. it determines:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the control flow graphs
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the loop tables
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the calling, change and use attributes of
|
||||
the procedure table entries
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
CF operates on one procedure at a time.
|
||||
For every procedure it first reads the EM instructions
|
||||
from the EM-text file and groups them into basic blocks.
|
||||
For every basic block, its successors and
|
||||
predecessors are determined,
|
||||
resulting in the control flow graph.
|
||||
Next, the immediate dominator of every basic block
|
||||
is computed.
|
||||
Using these dominators, any loop in the
|
||||
procedure is detected.
|
||||
Finally, interprocedural analysis is done,
|
||||
after which we will know the global effects of
|
||||
every procedure call on its environment.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
CF uses the same internal data structures
|
||||
for the procedure table and object table as IC.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Partitioning into basic blocks
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
With regard to flow of control, we distinguish
|
||||
three kinds of EM instructions:
|
||||
jump instructions, instruction label definitions and
|
||||
normal instructions.
|
||||
Jump instructions are all conditional or unconditional
|
||||
branch instructions,
|
||||
the case instructions (CSA/CSB)
|
||||
and the RET (return) instruction.
|
||||
A procedure call (CAL) is not considered to be a jump.
|
||||
A defining occurrence of an instruction label
|
||||
is regarded as an EM instruction.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An instruction starts
|
||||
a new basic block, in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
It is the first instruction of a procedure
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
It is the first of a list of instruction label
|
||||
defining occurrences
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
It follows a jump
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If there are several consecutive instruction labels
|
||||
(which is highly unusual),
|
||||
all of them are put in the same basic block.
|
||||
Note that several cases may overlap,
|
||||
e.g. a label definition at the beginning of a procedure
|
||||
or a label following a jump.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A simple Finite State Machine is used to model
|
||||
the above rules.
|
||||
It also recognizes the end of a procedure,
|
||||
marked by an END pseudo.
|
||||
The basic blocks are stored internally as a doubly linked
|
||||
linear list.
|
||||
The blocks are linked in textual order.
|
||||
Every node of this list has the attributes described
|
||||
in the previous chapter (see syntax rule for
|
||||
basic_block).
|
||||
Furthermore, every node contains a pointer to its
|
||||
EM instructions,
|
||||
which are represented internally
|
||||
as a linear, doubly linked list,
|
||||
just as in the IC phase.
|
||||
However, instead of one list per procedure (as in IC)
|
||||
there is now one list per basic block.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
On the fly, a table is build that maps
|
||||
every label identifier to the label definition
|
||||
instruction.
|
||||
This table is used for computing the control flow.
|
||||
The table is stored as a dynamically allocated array.
|
||||
The length of the array is the number of labels
|
||||
of the current procedure;
|
||||
this value can be found in the procedure table,
|
||||
where it was stored by IC.
|
|
@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Control Flow
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A \fIsuccessor\fR of a basic block B is a block C
|
||||
that can be executed immediately after B.
|
||||
C is said to be a \fIpredecessor\fR of B.
|
||||
A block ending with a RET instruction
|
||||
has no successors.
|
||||
Such a block is called a \fIreturn block\fR.
|
||||
Any block that has no predecessors cannot be
|
||||
executed at all (i.e. it is unreachable),
|
||||
unless it is the first block of a procedure,
|
||||
called the \fIprocedure entry block\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Internally, the successor and predecessor
|
||||
attributes of a basic block are stored as \fIsets\fR.
|
||||
Alternatively, one may regard all these
|
||||
sets of all basic blocks as a conceptual \fIgraph\fR,
|
||||
in which there is an edge from B to C if C
|
||||
is in the successor set of B.
|
||||
We call this conceptual graph
|
||||
the \fIControl Flow Graph\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The only successor of a basic block ending on an
|
||||
unconditional branch instruction is the block that
|
||||
contains the label definition of the target of the jump.
|
||||
The target instruction can be found via the LAB_ID
|
||||
that is the operand of the jump instruction,
|
||||
by using the label-map table mentioned
|
||||
above.
|
||||
If the last instruction of a block is a
|
||||
conditional jump,
|
||||
the successors are the target block and the textually
|
||||
next block.
|
||||
The last instruction can also be a case jump
|
||||
instruction (CSA or CSB).
|
||||
We then analyze the case descriptor,
|
||||
to find all possible target instructions
|
||||
and their associated blocks.
|
||||
We require the case descriptor to be allocated in
|
||||
a ROM, so it cannot be changed dynamically.
|
||||
A case jump via an alterable descriptor could in principle
|
||||
go to any label in the program.
|
||||
In the presence of such an uncontrolled jump,
|
||||
hardly any optimization can be done.
|
||||
We do not expect any front end to generate such a descriptor,
|
||||
however, because of the controlled nature
|
||||
of case statements in high level languages.
|
||||
If the basic block does not end in a jump instruction,
|
||||
its only successor is the textually next block.
|
|
@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Immediate dominators
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A basic block B dominates a block C if every path
|
||||
in the control flow graph from the procedure entry block
|
||||
to C goes through B.
|
||||
The immediate dominator of C is the closest dominator
|
||||
of C on any path from the entry block.
|
||||
See also
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.], section 13.1.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are a number of algorithms to compute
|
||||
the immediate dominator relation.
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
Purdom and Moore give an algorithm that is
|
||||
easy to program and easy to describe (although the
|
||||
description they give is unreadable;
|
||||
it is given in a very messy Algol60 program full of gotos).
|
||||
.[
|
||||
predominators
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
Aho and Ullman present a bitvector algorithm, which is also
|
||||
easy to program and to understand.
|
||||
(See
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.], section 13.1.]).
|
||||
.IP 3
|
||||
Lengauer and Tarjan introduce a fast algorithm that is
|
||||
hard to understand, yet remarkably easy to implement.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
lengauer dominators
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The Purdom-Moore algorithm is very slow if the
|
||||
number of basic blocks in the flow graph is large.
|
||||
The Aho-Ullman algorithm in fact computes the
|
||||
dominator relation,
|
||||
from which the immediate dominator relation can be computed
|
||||
in time quadratic to the number of basic blocks, worst case.
|
||||
The storage requirement is also quadratic to the number
|
||||
of blocks.
|
||||
The running time of the third algorithm is proportional
|
||||
to:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(number of edges in the graph) * log(number of blocks).
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
We have chosen this algorithm because it is fast
|
||||
(as shown by experiments done by Lengauer and Tarjan),
|
||||
it is easy to program and requires little data space.
|
|
@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Loop detection
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Loops are detected by using the loop construction
|
||||
algorithm of.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.], section 13.1.]
|
||||
This algorithm uses \fIback edges\fR.
|
||||
A back edge is an edge from B to C in the CFG,
|
||||
whose head (C) dominates its tail (B).
|
||||
The loop associated with this back edge
|
||||
consists of C plus all nodes in the CFG
|
||||
that can reach B without going through C.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As an example of how the algorithm works,
|
||||
consider the piece of program of Fig. 4.1.
|
||||
First just look at the program and try to
|
||||
see what part of the code constitutes the loop.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
loop
|
||||
if cond then 1
|
||||
-- lots of simple
|
||||
-- assignment
|
||||
-- statements 2 3
|
||||
exit; -- exit loop
|
||||
else
|
||||
S; -- one statement
|
||||
end if;
|
||||
end loop;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 4.1 A misleading loop
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Although a human being may be easily deceived
|
||||
by the brackets "loop" and "end loop",
|
||||
the loop detection algorithm will correctly
|
||||
reply that only the test for "cond" and
|
||||
the single statement in the false-part
|
||||
of the if statement are part of the loop!
|
||||
The statements in the true-part only get
|
||||
executed once, so there really is no reason at all
|
||||
to say they're part of the loop too.
|
||||
The CFG contains one back edge, "3->1".
|
||||
As node 3 cannot be reached from node 2,
|
||||
the latter node is not part of the loop.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A source of problems with the algorithm is the fact
|
||||
that different back edges may result in
|
||||
the same loop.
|
||||
Such an ill-structured loop is
|
||||
called a \fImessy\fR loop.
|
||||
After a loop has been constructed, it is checked
|
||||
if it is really a new loop.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Loops can partly overlap, without one being nested
|
||||
inside the other.
|
||||
This is the case in the program of Fig. 4.2.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
1: 1
|
||||
S1;
|
||||
2:
|
||||
S2; 2
|
||||
if cond then
|
||||
goto 4;
|
||||
S3; 3 4
|
||||
goto 1;
|
||||
4:
|
||||
S4;
|
||||
goto 1;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 4.2 Partly overlapping loops
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
There are two back edges "3->1" and "4->1",
|
||||
resulting in the loops {1,2,3} and {1,2,4}.
|
||||
With every basic block we associate a set of
|
||||
all loops it is part of.
|
||||
It is not sufficient just to record its
|
||||
most enclosing loop.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After all loops of a procedure are detected, we determine
|
||||
the nesting level of every loop.
|
||||
Finally, we find all strong and firm blocks of the loop.
|
||||
If the loop has only one back edge (i.e. it is not messy),
|
||||
the set of firm blocks consists of the
|
||||
head of this back edge and its dominators
|
||||
in the loop (including the loop entry block).
|
||||
A firm block is also strong if it is not a
|
||||
successor of a block that may exit the loop;
|
||||
a block may exit a loop if it has an (immediate) successor
|
||||
that is not part of the loop.
|
||||
For messy loops we do not determine the strong
|
||||
and firm blocks. These loops are expected
|
||||
to occur very rarely.
|
|
@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Interprocedural analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
It is often desirable to know the effects
|
||||
a procedure call may have.
|
||||
The optimization below is only possible if
|
||||
we know for sure that the call to P cannot
|
||||
change A.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
A := 10; A:= 10;
|
||||
P; -- procedure call --> P;
|
||||
B := A + 2; B := 12;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Although it is not possible to predict exactly
|
||||
all the effects a procedure call has, we may
|
||||
determine a kind of upper bound for it.
|
||||
So we compute all variables that may be
|
||||
changed by P, although they need not be
|
||||
changed at every invocation of P.
|
||||
We can get hold of this set by just looking
|
||||
at all assignment (store) instructions
|
||||
in the body of P.
|
||||
EM also has a set of \fIindirect\fR assignment
|
||||
instructions,
|
||||
i.e. assignment through a pointer variable.
|
||||
In general, it is not possible to determine
|
||||
which variable is affected by such an assignment.
|
||||
In these cases, we just record the fact that P
|
||||
does an indirect assignment.
|
||||
Note that this does not mean that all variables
|
||||
are potentially affected, as the front ends
|
||||
may generate messages telling that certain
|
||||
variables can never be accessed indirectly.
|
||||
We also set a flag if P does a use (load) indirect.
|
||||
Note that we only have to look at \fIglobal\fR
|
||||
variables.
|
||||
If P changes or uses any of its locals,
|
||||
this has no effect on its environment.
|
||||
Local variables of a lexically enclosing
|
||||
procedure can only be accessed indirectly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A procedure P may of course call another procedure.
|
||||
To determine the effects of a call to P,
|
||||
we also must know the effects of a call to the second procedure.
|
||||
This second one may call a third one, and so on.
|
||||
Effectively, we need to compute the \fItransitive closure\fR
|
||||
of the effects.
|
||||
To do this, we determine for every procedure
|
||||
which other procedures it calls.
|
||||
This set is the "calling" attribute of a procedure.
|
||||
One may regard all these sets as a conceptual graph,
|
||||
in which there is an edge from P to Q
|
||||
if Q is in the calling set of P. This graph will
|
||||
be referred to as the \fIcall graph\fR.
|
||||
(Note the resemblance with the control flow graph).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We can detect which procedures are called by P
|
||||
by looking at all CAL instructions in its body.
|
||||
Unfortunately, a procedure may also be
|
||||
called indirectly, via a CAI instruction.
|
||||
Yet, only procedures that are used as operand of an LPI
|
||||
instruction can be called indirect,
|
||||
because this is the only way to take the address of a procedure.
|
||||
We determine for every procedure whether it does
|
||||
a CAI instruction.
|
||||
We also build a set of all procedures used as
|
||||
operand of an LPI.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
After all procedures have been processed (i.e. all CFGs
|
||||
are constructed, all loops are detected,
|
||||
all procedures are analyzed to see which variables
|
||||
they may change, which procedures they call,
|
||||
whether they do a CAI or are used in an LPI) the
|
||||
transitive closure of all interprocedural
|
||||
information is computed.
|
||||
During the same process,
|
||||
the calling set of every procedure that uses a CAI
|
||||
is extended with the above mentioned set of all
|
||||
procedures that can be called indirect.
|
|
@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of CF are in the following files and packages:
|
||||
.IP cf.h: 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and data structures
|
||||
.IP cf.c:
|
||||
the routine main; interprocedural analysis;
|
||||
transitive closure
|
||||
.IP succ:
|
||||
control flow (successor and predecessor)
|
||||
.IP idom:
|
||||
immediate dominators
|
||||
.IP loop:
|
||||
loop detection
|
||||
.IP get:
|
||||
read object and procedure table;
|
||||
read EM text and partition it into basic blocks
|
||||
.IP put:
|
||||
write tables, CFGs and EM text
|
||||
.LP
|
|
@ -1 +0,0 @@
|
|||
cj1
|
144
doc/ego/cj/cj1
144
doc/ego/cj/cj1
|
@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Cross jumping
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Cross Jumping" optimization technique (CJ)
|
||||
.[
|
||||
wulf design optimizing compiler
|
||||
.]
|
||||
is basically a space optimization technique. It looks for pairs of
|
||||
basic blocks (B1,B2), for which:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
SUCC(B1) = SUCC(B2) = {S}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
(So B1 and B2 both have one and the same successor).
|
||||
If the last few non-branch instructions are the same for B1 and B2,
|
||||
one such sequence can be eliminated.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal:
|
||||
|
||||
if cond then
|
||||
S1
|
||||
S3
|
||||
else
|
||||
S2
|
||||
S3
|
||||
|
||||
(pseudo) EM:
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l l.
|
||||
TEST COND TEST COND
|
||||
BNE *1 BNE *1
|
||||
S1 S1
|
||||
S3 ---> BRA *2
|
||||
BRA *2 1:
|
||||
1: S2
|
||||
S2 2:
|
||||
S3 S3
|
||||
2:
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.1 An example of Cross Jumping
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
As the basic blocks have the same successor,
|
||||
at least one of them ends in an unconditional branch instruction (BRA).
|
||||
Hence no extra branch instruction is ever needed, just the target
|
||||
of an existing branch needs to be changed; neither the program size
|
||||
nor the execution time will ever increase.
|
||||
In general, the execution time will remain the same, unless
|
||||
further optimizations can be applied because of this optimization.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This optimization is particularly effective,
|
||||
because it cannot always be done by the programmer at the source level,
|
||||
as demonstrated by the Fig. 8.2.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal:
|
||||
|
||||
if cond then
|
||||
x := f(4)
|
||||
else
|
||||
x := g(5)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EM:
|
||||
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
... ...
|
||||
LOC 4 LOC 5
|
||||
CAL F CAL G
|
||||
ASP 2 ASP 2
|
||||
LFR 2 LFR 2
|
||||
STL X STL X
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.2 Effectiveness of Cross Jumping
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
At the source level there is no common tail,
|
||||
but at the EM level there is a common tail.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The implementation of cross jumping is rather straightforward.
|
||||
The technique is applied to one procedure at a time.
|
||||
The control flow graph of the procedure
|
||||
is scanned for pairs of basic blocks
|
||||
with the same (single) successor and with common tails.
|
||||
Note that there may be more than two such blocks (e.g. as the result
|
||||
of a case statement).
|
||||
This is dealt with by repeating the entire process until no
|
||||
further optimizations can de done for the current procedure.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
If a suitable pair of basic blocks has been found, the control flow
|
||||
graph must be altered. One of the basic
|
||||
blocks must be split into two.
|
||||
The control flow graphs before and after the optimization are shown
|
||||
in Fig. 9.3 and Fig. 9.4.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
| S1 | | S2 |
|
||||
| S3 | | S3 |
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| |
|
||||
|------------------|--------------------|
|
||||
|
|
||||
v
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.3 CFG before optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
| S1 | | S2 |
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| |
|
||||
|--------------------<------------------|
|
||||
v
|
||||
--------
|
||||
| |
|
||||
| S3 |
|
||||
| |
|
||||
--------
|
||||
|
|
||||
v
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.4 CFG after optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Some attributes of the three resulting blocks (such as immediate dominator)
|
||||
are updated.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In some cases, cross jumping might split the computation of an expression
|
||||
into two, by inserting a branch somewhere in the middle.
|
||||
Most code generators will generate very poor assembly code when
|
||||
presented with such EM code.
|
||||
Therefor, cross jumping is not performed in these cases.
|
|
@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
|
|||
cs1
|
||||
cs2
|
||||
cs3
|
||||
cs4
|
||||
cs5
|
|
@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Common subexpression elimination
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Common Subexpression Elimination optimization technique (CS)
|
||||
tries to eliminate multiple computations of EM expressions
|
||||
that yield the same result.
|
||||
It places the result of one such computation
|
||||
in a temporary variable,
|
||||
and replaces the other computations by a reference
|
||||
to this temporary variable.
|
||||
The primary goal of this technique is to decrease
|
||||
the execution time of the program,
|
||||
but in general it will save space too.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As an example of the application of Common Subexpression Elimination,
|
||||
consider the piece of program in Fig. 7.1(a).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l l.
|
||||
x := a * b; TMP := a * b; x := a * b;
|
||||
CODE; x := TMP; CODE
|
||||
y := c + a * b; CODE y := x;
|
||||
y := c + TMP;
|
||||
|
||||
(a) (b) (c)
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.1 Examples of Common Subexpression Elimination
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If neither a nor b is changed in CODE,
|
||||
the instructions can be replaced by those of Fig. 7.1(b),
|
||||
which saves one multiplication,
|
||||
but costs an extra store instruction.
|
||||
If the value of x is not changed in CODE either,
|
||||
the instructions can be replaced by those of Fig. 7.1(c).
|
||||
In this case
|
||||
the extra store is not needed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the following sections we will describe
|
||||
which transformations are done
|
||||
by CS and how this phase
|
||||
was implemented.
|
|
@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Specification of the Common Subexpression Elimination phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In this section we will describe
|
||||
the window
|
||||
through which CS examines the code,
|
||||
the expressions recognized by CS,
|
||||
and finally the changes made to the code.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The working window
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The CS algorithm is applied to the
|
||||
largest sequence of textually adjacent basic blocks
|
||||
B1,..,Bn, for which
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
PRED(Bj) = {Bj-1}, j = 2,..,n.
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Intuitively, this window consists of straight line code,
|
||||
with only one entry point (at the beginning); it may
|
||||
contain jumps, which should all have their targets outside the window.
|
||||
This is illustrated in Fig. 7.2.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
x := a * b; (1)
|
||||
if x < 10 then (2)
|
||||
y := a * b; (3)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.2 The working window of CS
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Line (2) can only be executed after line (1).
|
||||
Likewise, line (3) can only be executed after
|
||||
line (2).
|
||||
Both a and b have the same values at line (1) and at line (3).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Larger windows were avoided.
|
||||
In Fig. 7.3, the value of a at line (4) may have been obtained
|
||||
at more than one point.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
x := a * b; (1)
|
||||
if x < 10 then (2)
|
||||
a := 100; (3)
|
||||
y := a * b; (4)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.3 Several working windows
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Recognized expressions.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The computations eliminated by CS need not be normal expressions
|
||||
(like "a * b"),
|
||||
but can even consist of a single operand that is expensive to access,
|
||||
such as an array element or a record field.
|
||||
If an array element is used,
|
||||
its address is computed implicitly.
|
||||
CS is able to eliminate either the element itself or its
|
||||
address, whichever one is most profitable.
|
||||
A variable of a textually enclosing procedure may also be
|
||||
expensive to access, depending on the lexical level difference.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Transformations
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
CS creates a new temporary local variable (TMP)
|
||||
for every eliminated expression,
|
||||
unless it is able to use an existing local variable.
|
||||
It emits code to initialize this variable with the
|
||||
result of the expression.
|
||||
Most recurrences of the expression
|
||||
can simply be replaced by a reference to TMP.
|
||||
If the address of an array element is recognized as
|
||||
a common subexpression,
|
||||
references to the element itself are replaced by
|
||||
indirect references through TMP (see Fig. 7.4).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l l.
|
||||
x := A[i]; TMP := &A[i];
|
||||
. . . --> x := *TMP;
|
||||
A[i] := y; . . .
|
||||
*TMP := y;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.4 Elimination of an array address computation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Here, '&' is the 'address of' operator,
|
||||
and unary '*' is the indirection operator.
|
||||
(Note that EM actually has different instructions to do
|
||||
a use-indirect or an assign-indirect.)
|
250
doc/ego/cs/cs3
250
doc/ego/cs/cs3
|
@ -1,250 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The value number method
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To determine whether two expressions have the same result,
|
||||
there must be some way to determine whether their operands have
|
||||
the same values.
|
||||
We use a system of \fIvalue numbers\fP
|
||||
.[
|
||||
kennedy data flow analysis
|
||||
.]
|
||||
in which each distinct value of whatever type,
|
||||
created or used within the working window,
|
||||
receives a unique identifying number, its value number.
|
||||
Two items have the same value number if and only if,
|
||||
based only upon information from the instructions in the window,
|
||||
their values are provably identical.
|
||||
For example, after processing the statement
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
a := 4;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
the variable a and the constant 4 have the same value number.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The value number of the result of an expression depends only
|
||||
on the kind of operator and the value number(s) of the operand(s).
|
||||
The expressions need not be textually equal, as shown in Fig. 7.5.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
a := c; (1)
|
||||
use(a * b); (2)
|
||||
d := b; (3)
|
||||
use(c * d); (4)
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.5 Different expressions with the same value number
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
At line (1) a receives the same value number as c.
|
||||
At line (2) d receives the same value number as b.
|
||||
At line (4) the expression "c * d" receives the same value number
|
||||
as the expression "a * b" at line (2),
|
||||
because the value numbers of their left and right operands are the same,
|
||||
and the operator (*) is the same.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As another example of the value number method, consider Fig. 7.6.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
use(a * b); (1)
|
||||
a := 123; (2)
|
||||
use(a * b); (3)
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.6 Identical expressions with the different value numbers
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Although textually the expressions "a * b" in line 1 and line 3 are equal,
|
||||
a will have different value numbers at line 3 and line 1.
|
||||
The two expressions will not mistakenly be recognized as equivalent.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Entities
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Value Number Method distinguishes between operators and operands.
|
||||
The value numbers of operands are stored in a table,
|
||||
called the \fIsymbol table\fR.
|
||||
The value number of a subexpression depends on the
|
||||
(root) operator of the expression and on the value numbers
|
||||
of its operands.
|
||||
A table of "available expressions" is used to do this mapping.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
CS recognizes the following kinds of EM operands, called \fIentities\fR:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
- constant
|
||||
- local variable
|
||||
- external variable
|
||||
- indirectly accessed entity
|
||||
- offsetted entity
|
||||
- address of local variable
|
||||
- address of external variable
|
||||
- address of offsetted entity
|
||||
- address of local base
|
||||
- address of argument base
|
||||
- array element
|
||||
- procedure identifier
|
||||
- floating zero
|
||||
- local base
|
||||
- heap pointer
|
||||
- ignore mask
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Whenever a new entity is encountered in the working window,
|
||||
it is entered in the symbol table and given a brand new value number.
|
||||
Most entities have attributes (e.g. the offset in
|
||||
the current stackframe for local variables),
|
||||
which are also stored in the symbol table.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An entity is called static if its value cannot be changed
|
||||
(e.g. a constant or an address).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Parsing expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Common subexpressions are recognized by simulating the behaviour
|
||||
of the EM machine.
|
||||
The EM code is parsed from left to right;
|
||||
as EM is postfix code, this is a bottom up parse.
|
||||
At any point the current state of the EM runtime stack is
|
||||
reflected by a simulated "fake stack",
|
||||
containing descriptions of the parsed operands and expressions.
|
||||
A descriptor consists of:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) the value number of the operand or expression
|
||||
(2) the size of the operand or expression
|
||||
(3) a pointer to the first line of EM-code
|
||||
that constitutes the operand or expression
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Note that operands may consist of several EM instructions.
|
||||
Whenever an operator is encountered, the
|
||||
descriptors of its operands are on top of the fake stack.
|
||||
The operator and the value numbers of the operands
|
||||
are used as indices in the table of available expressions,
|
||||
to determine the value number of the expression.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
During the parsing process,
|
||||
we keep track of the first line of each expression;
|
||||
we need this information when we decide to eliminate the expression.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Updating entities
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An entity is assigned a value number when it is
|
||||
used for the first time
|
||||
in the working window.
|
||||
If the entity is used as left hand side of an assignment,
|
||||
it gets the value number of the right hand side.
|
||||
Sometimes the effects of an instruction on an entity cannot
|
||||
be determined exactly;
|
||||
the current value and value number of the entity may become
|
||||
inconsistent.
|
||||
Hence the current value number must be forgotten.
|
||||
This is achieved by giving the entity a new value number
|
||||
that was not used before.
|
||||
The entity is said to be \fIkilled\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As information is lost when an entity is killed,
|
||||
CS tries to save as many entities as possible.
|
||||
In case of an indirect assignment through a pointer,
|
||||
some analysis is done to see which variables cannot be altered.
|
||||
For a procedure call, the interprocedural information contained
|
||||
in the procedure table is used to restrict the set of entities that may
|
||||
be changed by the call.
|
||||
Local variables for which the front end generated
|
||||
a register message can never be changed by an indirect assignment
|
||||
or a procedure call.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Changing the EM text
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When a new expression comes available,
|
||||
it is checked whether its result is saved in a local
|
||||
that may go in a register.
|
||||
The last line of the expression must be followed
|
||||
by a STL or SDL instruction
|
||||
(depending on the size of the result)
|
||||
and a register message must be present for
|
||||
this local.
|
||||
If there is such a local,
|
||||
it is recorded in the available expressions table.
|
||||
Each time a new occurrence of this expression
|
||||
is found,
|
||||
the value number of the local is compared against
|
||||
the value number of the result.
|
||||
If they are different the local cannot be used and is forgotten.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The available expressions are linked in a list.
|
||||
New expressions are linked at the head of the list.
|
||||
In this way expressions that are contained within other
|
||||
expressions appear later in the list,
|
||||
because EM-expressions are postfix.
|
||||
The elimination process walks through the list,
|
||||
starting at the head, to find the largest expressions first.
|
||||
If an expression is eliminated,
|
||||
any expression later on in the list, contained in the former expression,
|
||||
is removed from the list,
|
||||
as expressions can only be eliminated once.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A STL or SDL is emitted after the first occurrence of the expression,
|
||||
unless there was an existing local variable that could hold the result.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Desirability analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Although the global optimizer works on EM code,
|
||||
the goal is to improve the quality of the object code.
|
||||
Therefore some machine-dependent information is needed
|
||||
to decide whether it is desirable to
|
||||
eliminate a given expression.
|
||||
Because it is impossible for the CS phase to know
|
||||
exactly what code will be generated,
|
||||
some heuristics are used.
|
||||
CS essentially looks for some special cases
|
||||
that should not be eliminated.
|
||||
These special cases can be turned on or off for a given machine,
|
||||
as indicated in a machine descriptor file.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Some operators can sometimes be translated
|
||||
into an addressing mode for the machine at hand.
|
||||
Such an operator is only eliminated
|
||||
if its operand is itself expensive,
|
||||
i.e. it is not just a simple load.
|
||||
The machine descriptor file contains a set of such operators.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Eliminating the loading of the Local Base or
|
||||
the Argument Base by the LXL resp. LXA instruction
|
||||
is only beneficial if the difference in lexical levels
|
||||
exceeds a certain threshold.
|
||||
The machine descriptor file contains this threshold.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Replacing a SAR or a LAR by an AAR followed by a LOI
|
||||
may possibly increase the size of the object code.
|
||||
We assume that this is only possible when the
|
||||
size of the array element is greater than some limit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are back ends that can very efficiently translate
|
||||
the index computing instruction sequence LOC SLI ADS.
|
||||
If this is the case,
|
||||
the SLI instruction between a LOC
|
||||
and an ADS is not eliminated.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To handle unforseen cases, the descriptor file may also contain
|
||||
a set of operators that should never be eliminated.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The algorithm
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After these preparatory explanations,
|
||||
the algorithm itself is easy to understand.
|
||||
For each instruction within the current window,
|
||||
the following steps are performed in the given order :
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
Check if this instruction defines an entity.
|
||||
If so, the set of entities is updated accordingly.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
Kill all entities that might be affected by this instruction.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
Simulate the instruction on the fake-stack.
|
||||
If this instruction is an operator,
|
||||
update the list of available expressions accordingly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The result of this process is
|
||||
a list of available expressions plus the information
|
||||
needed to eliminate them.
|
||||
Expressions that are desirable to eliminate are eliminated.
|
||||
Next, the window is shifted and the process is repeated.
|
311
doc/ego/cs/cs4
311
doc/ego/cs/cs4
|
@ -1,311 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In this section we will discuss the implementation of the CS phase.
|
||||
We will first describe the basic actions that are undertaken
|
||||
by the algorithm, than the algorithm itself.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Partioning the EM instructions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are over 100 EM instructions.
|
||||
For our purpose we partition this huge set into groups of
|
||||
instructions which can be more or less conveniently handled together.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are groups for all sorts of load instructions:
|
||||
simple loads, expensive loads, loads of an array element.
|
||||
A load is considered \fIexpensive\fP when more than one EM instructions
|
||||
are involved in loading it.
|
||||
The load of a lexical entity is also considered expensive.
|
||||
For instance: LOF is expensive, LAL is not.
|
||||
LAR forms a group on its own,
|
||||
because it is not only an expensive load,
|
||||
but also implicitly includes the ternary operator AAR,
|
||||
which computes the address of the array element.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are groups for all sorts of operators:
|
||||
unary, binary, and ternary.
|
||||
The groups of operators are further partitioned according to the size
|
||||
of their operand(s) and result.
|
||||
.\" .PP
|
||||
.\" The distinction between operators and expensive loads is not always clear.
|
||||
.\" The ADP instruction for example,
|
||||
.\" might seem a unary operator because it pops one item
|
||||
.\" (a pointer) from the stack.
|
||||
.\" However, two ADP-instructions which pop an item with the same value number
|
||||
.\" need not have the same result,
|
||||
.\" because the attributes (an offset, to be added to the pointer)
|
||||
.\" can be different.
|
||||
.\" Is it then a binary operator?
|
||||
.\" That would give rise to the strange, and undesirable,
|
||||
.\" situation that some binary operators pop two operands
|
||||
.\" and others pop one.
|
||||
.\" The conclusion is inevitable:
|
||||
.\" we have been fooled by the name (ADd Pointer).
|
||||
.\" The ADP-instruction is an expensive load.
|
||||
.\" In this context LAF, meaning Load Address of oFfsetted,
|
||||
.\" would have been a better name,
|
||||
.\" corresponding to LOF, like LAL,
|
||||
.\" Load Address of Local, corresponds to LOL.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are groups for all sorts of stores:
|
||||
direct, indirect, array element.
|
||||
The SAR forms a group on its own for the same reason
|
||||
as appeared with LAR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The effect of the remaining instructions is less clear.
|
||||
They do not help very much in parsing expressions or
|
||||
in constructing our pseudo symboltable.
|
||||
They are partitioned according to the following criteria:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They change the value of an entity without using the stack
|
||||
(e.g. ZRL, DEE).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They are subroutine calls (CAI, CAL).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They change the stack in some irreproduceable way (e.g. ASP, LFR, DUP).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They have no effect whatever on the stack or on the entities.
|
||||
This does not mean they can be deleted,
|
||||
but they can be ignored for the moment
|
||||
(e.g. MES, LIN, NOP).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
Their effect is too complicate too compute,
|
||||
so we just assume worst case behaviour.
|
||||
Hopefully, they do not occur very often.
|
||||
(e.g. MON, STR, BLM).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They signal the end of the basic block (e.g. BLT, RET, TRP).
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Parsing expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To recognize expressions,
|
||||
we simulate the behaviour of the EM machine,
|
||||
by means of a fake-stack.
|
||||
When we scan the instructions in sequential order,
|
||||
we first encounter the instructions that load
|
||||
the operands on the stack,
|
||||
and then the instruction that indicates the operator,
|
||||
because EM expressions are postfix.
|
||||
When we find an instruction to load an operand,
|
||||
we load on the fake-stack a struct with the following information:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
(1) the value number of the operand
|
||||
(2) the size of the operand
|
||||
(3) a pointer to the first line of EM-code
|
||||
that constitutes the operand
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
In most cases, (3) will point to the line
|
||||
that loaded the operand (e.g. LOL, LOC),
|
||||
i.e. there is only one line that refers to this operand,
|
||||
but sometimes some information must be popped
|
||||
to load the operand (e.g. LOI, LAR).
|
||||
This information must have been pushed before,
|
||||
so we also pop a pointer to the first line that pushed
|
||||
the information.
|
||||
This line is now the first line that defines the operand.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When we find the operator instruction,
|
||||
we pop its operand(s) from the fake-stack.
|
||||
The first line that defines the first operand is
|
||||
now the first line of the expression.
|
||||
We now have all information to determine
|
||||
whether the just parsed expression has occurred before.
|
||||
We also know the first and last line of the expression;
|
||||
we need this when we decide to eliminate it.
|
||||
Associated with each available expression is a set of
|
||||
which the elements contains the first and last line of
|
||||
a recurrence of this expression.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Not only will the operand(s) be popped from the fake-stack,
|
||||
but the following will be pushed:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
(1) the value number of the result
|
||||
(2) the size of the result
|
||||
(3) a pointer to the first line of the expression
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
In this way an item on the fake-stack always contains
|
||||
the necessary information.
|
||||
EM expressions are parsed bottum up.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Updating entities
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As said before,
|
||||
we build our private "symboltable",
|
||||
while scanning the EM-instructions.
|
||||
The behaviour of the EM-machine is not only reflected
|
||||
in the fake-stack,
|
||||
but also in the entities.
|
||||
When an entity is created,
|
||||
we do not yet know its value,
|
||||
so we assign a brand new value number to it.
|
||||
Each time a store-instruction is encountered,
|
||||
we change the value number of the target entity of this store
|
||||
to the value number of the token that was popped
|
||||
from the fake-stack.
|
||||
Because entities may overlap,
|
||||
we must also "forget" the value numbers of entities
|
||||
that might be affected by this store.
|
||||
Each such entity will be \fIkilled\fP,
|
||||
i.e. assigned a brand new valuenumber.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Because we lose information when we forget
|
||||
the value number of an entity,
|
||||
we try to save as much entities as possible.
|
||||
When we store into an external,
|
||||
we don't have to kill locals and vice versa.
|
||||
Furthermore, we can see whether two locals or
|
||||
two externals overlap,
|
||||
because we know the offset from the local base,
|
||||
resp. the offset within the data block,
|
||||
and the size.
|
||||
The situation becomes more complicated when we have
|
||||
to consider indirection.
|
||||
The worst case is that we store through an unknown pointer.
|
||||
In that case we kill all entities except those locals
|
||||
for which a so-called \fIregister message\fP has been generated;
|
||||
this register message indicates that this local can never be
|
||||
accessed indirectly.
|
||||
If we know this pointer we can be more careful.
|
||||
If it points to a local then the entity that is accessed through
|
||||
this pointer can never overlap with an external.
|
||||
If it points to an external this entity can never overlap with a local.
|
||||
Furthermore, in the latter case,
|
||||
we can find the data block this entity belongs to.
|
||||
Since pointer arithmetic is only defined within a data block,
|
||||
this entity can never overlap with entities that are known to
|
||||
belong to another data block.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Not only after a store-instruction but also after a
|
||||
subroutine-call it may be necessary to kill entities;
|
||||
the subroutine may affect global variables or store
|
||||
through a pointer.
|
||||
If a subroutine is called that is not available as EM-text,
|
||||
we assume worst case behaviour,
|
||||
i.e. we kill all entities without register message.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Additions and replacements.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When a new expression comes available,
|
||||
we check whether the result is saved in a local
|
||||
that may go in a register.
|
||||
The last line of the expression must be followed
|
||||
by a STL or SDL instruction,
|
||||
depending on the size of the result
|
||||
(resp. WS and 2*WS),
|
||||
and a register message must be present for
|
||||
this local.
|
||||
If we have found such a local,
|
||||
we store a pointer to it with the available expression.
|
||||
Each time a new occurrence of this expression
|
||||
is found,
|
||||
we compare the value number of the local against
|
||||
the value number of the result.
|
||||
When they are different we remove the pointer to it,
|
||||
because we cannot use it.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The available expressions are singly linked in a list.
|
||||
When a new expression comes available,
|
||||
we link it at the head of the list.
|
||||
In this way expressions that are contained within other
|
||||
expressions appear later in the list,
|
||||
because EM-expressions are postfix.
|
||||
When we are going to eliminate expressions,
|
||||
we walk through the list,
|
||||
starting at the head, to find the largest expressions first.
|
||||
When we decide to eliminate an expression,
|
||||
we look at the expressions in the tail of the list,
|
||||
starting from where we are now,
|
||||
to delete expressions that are contained within
|
||||
the chosen one because
|
||||
we cannot eliminate an expression more than once.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When we are going to eliminate expressions,
|
||||
and we do not have a local that holds the result,
|
||||
we emit a STL or SDL after the line where the expression
|
||||
was first found.
|
||||
The other occurrences are simply removed,
|
||||
unless they contain instructions that not only have
|
||||
effect on the stack; e.g. messages, stores, calls.
|
||||
Before each instruction that needs the result on the stack,
|
||||
we emit a LOL or LDL.
|
||||
When the expression was an AAR,
|
||||
but the instruction was a LAR or a SAR,
|
||||
we append a LOI resp. a STI of the number of bytes
|
||||
in an array-element after each LOL/LDL.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Desirability analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Although the global optimizer works on EM code,
|
||||
the goal is to improve the quality of the object code.
|
||||
Therefore we need some machine dependent information
|
||||
to decide whether it is desirable to
|
||||
eliminate a given expression.
|
||||
Because it is impossible for the CS phase to know
|
||||
exactly what code will be generated,
|
||||
we use some heuristics.
|
||||
In most cases it will save time when we eliminate an
|
||||
operator, so we just do it.
|
||||
We only look for some special cases.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Some operators can in some cases be translated
|
||||
into an addressing mode for the machine at hand.
|
||||
We only eliminate such an operator,
|
||||
when its operand is itself "expensive",
|
||||
i.e. not just a simple load.
|
||||
The user of the CS phase has to supply
|
||||
a set of such operators.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Eliminating the loading of the Local Base or
|
||||
the Argument Base by the LXL resp. LXA instruction
|
||||
is only beneficial when the number of lexical levels
|
||||
we have to go back exceeds a certain threshold.
|
||||
This threshold will be different when registers
|
||||
are saved by the back end.
|
||||
The user must supply this threshold.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Replacing a SAR or a LAR by an AAR followed by a LOI
|
||||
may possibly increase the size of the object code.
|
||||
We assume that this is only possible when the
|
||||
size of the array element is greater than some
|
||||
(user-supplied) limit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are back ends that can very efficiently translate
|
||||
the index computing instruction sequence LOC SLI ADS.
|
||||
If this is the case,
|
||||
we do not eliminate the SLI instruction between a LOC
|
||||
and an ADS.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To handle unforeseen cases, the user may also supply
|
||||
a set of operators that should never be eliminated.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The algorithm
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After these preparatory explanations,
|
||||
we can be short about the algorithm itself.
|
||||
For each instruction within our window,
|
||||
the following steps are performed in the order given:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
We check if this instructin defines an entity.
|
||||
If this is the case the set of entities is updated accordingly.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
We kill all entities that might be affected by this instruction.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The instruction is simulated on the fake-stack.
|
||||
Copy propagation is done.
|
||||
If this instruction is an operator,
|
||||
we update the list of available expressions accordingly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When we have processed all instructions this way,
|
||||
we have built a list of available expressions plus the information we
|
||||
need to eliminate them.
|
||||
Those expressions of which desirability analysis tells us so,
|
||||
we eliminate.
|
||||
The we shift our window and continue.
|
|
@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files of CS
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of CS are in the following files and packages:
|
||||
.IP cs.h 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and data structures
|
||||
.IP cs.c
|
||||
the routine main;
|
||||
a driving routine to process
|
||||
the basic blocks in the right order
|
||||
.IP vnm
|
||||
implements a procedure that performs
|
||||
the value numbering on one basic block
|
||||
.IP eliminate
|
||||
implements a procedure that does the
|
||||
transformations, if desirable
|
||||
.IP avail
|
||||
implements a procedure that manipulates the list of available expressions
|
||||
.IP entity
|
||||
implements a procedure that manipulates the set of entities
|
||||
.IP getentity
|
||||
implements a procedure that extracts the
|
||||
pseudo symboltable information from EM-instructions;
|
||||
uses a small table
|
||||
.IP kill
|
||||
implements several routines that find the entities
|
||||
that might be changed by EM-instructions
|
||||
and kill them
|
||||
.IP partition
|
||||
implements several routines that partition the huge set
|
||||
of EM-instructions into more or less manageable,
|
||||
more or less logical chunks
|
||||
.IP profit
|
||||
implements a procedure that decides whether it
|
||||
is advantageous to eliminate an expression;
|
||||
also removes expressions with side-effects
|
||||
.IP stack
|
||||
implements the fake-stack and operations on it
|
||||
.IP alloc
|
||||
implements several allocation routines
|
||||
.IP aux
|
||||
implements several auxiliary routines
|
||||
.IP debug
|
||||
implements several routines to provide debugging
|
||||
and verbose output
|
||||
.LP
|
|
@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
|
|||
ic1
|
||||
ic2
|
||||
ic3
|
||||
ic4
|
||||
ic5
|
|
@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
The Intermediate Code and the IC phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In this chapter the intermediate code of the EM global optimizer
|
||||
will be defined.
|
||||
The 'Intermediate Code construction' phase (IC),
|
||||
which builds the initial intermediate code from
|
||||
EM Compact Assembly Language,
|
||||
will be described.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The EM global optimizer is a multi pass program,
|
||||
hence there is a need for an intermediate code.
|
||||
Usually, programs in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit use the
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language format
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.2]
|
||||
for this purpose.
|
||||
Although this code has some convenient features,
|
||||
such as being compact,
|
||||
it is quite unsuitable in our case,
|
||||
because of a number of reasons.
|
||||
At first, the code lacks global information
|
||||
about whole procedures or whole basic blocks.
|
||||
Second, it uses identifiers ('names') to bind
|
||||
defining and applied occurrences of
|
||||
procedures, data labels and instruction labels.
|
||||
Although this is usual in high level programming
|
||||
languages, it is awkward in an intermediate code
|
||||
that must be read many times.
|
||||
Each pass of the optimizer would have
|
||||
to incorporate an identifier look-up mechanism
|
||||
to associate a defining occurrence with each
|
||||
applied occurrence of an identifier.
|
||||
Finally, EM programs are used to declare blocks of bytes,
|
||||
rather than variables. A 'hol 6' instruction may be used to
|
||||
declare three 2-byte variables.
|
||||
Clearly, the optimizer wants to deal with variables, and
|
||||
not with rows of bytes.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To overcome these problems, we have developed a new
|
||||
intermediate code.
|
||||
This code does not merely consist of the EM instructions,
|
||||
but also contains global information in the
|
||||
form of tables and graphs.
|
||||
Before describing the intermediate code we will
|
||||
first leap aside to outline
|
||||
the problems one generally encounters
|
||||
when trying to store complex data structures such as
|
||||
graphs outside the program, i.e. in a file.
|
||||
We trust this will enhance the
|
||||
comprehensibility of the
|
||||
intermediate code definition and the design and implementation
|
||||
of the IC phase.
|
150
doc/ego/ic/ic2
150
doc/ego/ic/ic2
|
@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Representation of complex data structures in a sequential file
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Most programmers are quite used to deal with
|
||||
complex data structures, such as
|
||||
arrays, graphs and trees.
|
||||
There are some particular problems that occur
|
||||
when storing such a data structure
|
||||
in a sequential file.
|
||||
We call data that is kept in
|
||||
main memory
|
||||
.UL internal
|
||||
,as opposed to
|
||||
.UL external
|
||||
data
|
||||
that is kept in a file outside the program.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
We assume a simple data structure of a
|
||||
scalar type (integer, floating point number)
|
||||
has some known external representation.
|
||||
An
|
||||
.UL array
|
||||
having elements of a scalar type can be represented
|
||||
externally easily, by successively
|
||||
representing its elements.
|
||||
The external representation may be preceded by a
|
||||
number, giving the length of the array.
|
||||
Now, consider a linear, singly linked list,
|
||||
the elements of which look like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
record
|
||||
data: scalar_type;
|
||||
next: pointer_type;
|
||||
end;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
It is significant to note that the "next"
|
||||
fields of the elements only have a meaning within
|
||||
main memory.
|
||||
The field contains the address of some location in
|
||||
main memory.
|
||||
If a list element is written to a file in
|
||||
some program,
|
||||
and read by another program,
|
||||
the element will be allocated at a different
|
||||
address in main memory.
|
||||
Hence this address value is completely
|
||||
useless outside the program.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
One may represent the list by ignoring these "next" fields
|
||||
and storing the data items in the order they are linked.
|
||||
The "next" fields are represented \fIimplicitly\fR.
|
||||
When the file is read again,
|
||||
the same list can be reconstructed.
|
||||
In order to know where the external representation of the
|
||||
list ends,
|
||||
it may be useful to put the length of
|
||||
the list in front of it.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Note that arrays and linear lists have the
|
||||
same external representation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A doubly linked, linear list,
|
||||
with elements of the type:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
record
|
||||
data: scalar_type;
|
||||
next,
|
||||
previous: pointer_type;
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
can be represented in precisely the same way.
|
||||
Both the "next" and the "previous" fields are represented
|
||||
implicitly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Next, consider a binary tree,
|
||||
the nodes of which have type:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
record
|
||||
data: scalar_type;
|
||||
left,
|
||||
right: pointer_type;
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Such a tree can be represented sequentially,
|
||||
by storing its nodes in some fixed order, e.g. prefix order.
|
||||
A special null data item may be used to
|
||||
denote a missing left or right son.
|
||||
For example, let the scalar type be integer,
|
||||
and let the null item be 0.
|
||||
Then the tree of fig. 3.1(a)
|
||||
can be represented as in fig. 3.1(b).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
4
|
||||
/ \e
|
||||
9 12
|
||||
/ \e / \e
|
||||
12 3 4 6
|
||||
/ \e \e /
|
||||
8 1 5 1
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 3.1(a) A binary tree
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
4 9 12 0 0 3 8 0 0 1 0 0 12 4 0 5 0 0 6 1 0 0 0
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 3.1(b) Its sequential representation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
We are still able to represent the pointer fields ("left"
|
||||
and "right") implicitly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Finally, consider a general
|
||||
.UL graph
|
||||
, where each node has a "data" field and
|
||||
pointer fields,
|
||||
with no restriction on where they may point to.
|
||||
Now we're at the end of our tale.
|
||||
There is no way to represent the pointers implicitly,
|
||||
like we did with lists and trees.
|
||||
In order to represent them explicitly,
|
||||
we use the following scheme.
|
||||
Every node gets an extra field,
|
||||
containing some unique number that identifies the node.
|
||||
We call this number its
|
||||
.UL id.
|
||||
A pointer is represented externally as the id of the node
|
||||
it points to.
|
||||
When reading the file we use a table that maps
|
||||
an id to the address of its node.
|
||||
In general this table will not be completely filled in
|
||||
until we have read the entire external representation of
|
||||
the graph and allocated internal memory locations for
|
||||
every node.
|
||||
Hence we cannot reconstruct the graph in one scan.
|
||||
That is, there may be some pointers from node A to B,
|
||||
where B is placed after A in the sequential file than A.
|
||||
When we read the node of A we cannot map the id of B
|
||||
to the address of node B,
|
||||
as we have not yet allocated node B.
|
||||
We can overcome this problem if the size
|
||||
of every node is known in advance.
|
||||
In this case we can allocate memory for a node
|
||||
on first reference.
|
||||
Else, the mapping from id to pointer
|
||||
cannot be done while reading nodes.
|
||||
The mapping can be done either in an extra scan
|
||||
or at every reference to the node.
|
431
doc/ego/ic/ic3
431
doc/ego/ic/ic3
|
@ -1,431 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Definition of the intermediate code
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The intermediate code of the optimizer consists
|
||||
of several components:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the object table
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the procedure table
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the em code
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the control flow graphs
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the loop table
|
||||
.LP -
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
These components are described in
|
||||
the next sections.
|
||||
The syntactic structure of every component
|
||||
is described by a set of context free syntax rules,
|
||||
with the following conventions:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
x a non-terminal symbol
|
||||
A a terminal symbol (in capitals)
|
||||
x: a b c; a grammar rule
|
||||
a | b a or b
|
||||
(a)+ 1 or more occurrences of a
|
||||
{a} 0 or more occurrences of a
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The object table
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
EM programs declare blocks of bytes rather than (global) variables.
|
||||
A typical program may declare 'HOL 7780'
|
||||
to allocate space for 8 I/O buffers,
|
||||
2 large arrays and 10 scalar variables.
|
||||
The optimizer wants to deal with
|
||||
.UL objects
|
||||
like variables, buffers and arrays
|
||||
and certainly not with huge numbers of bytes.
|
||||
Therefore the intermediate code contains information
|
||||
about which global objects are used.
|
||||
This information can be obtained from an EM program
|
||||
by just looking at the operands of instruction
|
||||
such as LOE, LAE, LDE, STE, SDE, INE, DEE and ZRE.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The object table consists of a list of
|
||||
.UL datablock
|
||||
entries.
|
||||
Each such entry represents a declaration like HOL, BSS,
|
||||
CON or ROM.
|
||||
There are five kinds of datablock entries.
|
||||
The fifth kind,
|
||||
UNKNOWN, denotes a declaration in a
|
||||
separately compiled file that is not made
|
||||
available to the optimizer.
|
||||
Each datablock entry contains the type of the block,
|
||||
its size, and a description of the objects that
|
||||
belong to it.
|
||||
If it is a rom,
|
||||
it also contains a list of values given
|
||||
as arguments to the rom instruction,
|
||||
provided that this list contains only integer numbers.
|
||||
An object has an offset (within its datablock)
|
||||
and a size.
|
||||
The size need not always be determinable.
|
||||
Both datablock and object contain a unique
|
||||
identifying number
|
||||
(see previous section for their use).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(1i) l l.
|
||||
object_table:
|
||||
{datablock} ;
|
||||
datablock:
|
||||
D_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
PSEUDO -- one of ROM,CON,BSS,HOL,UNKNOWN
|
||||
SIZE -- # bytes declared
|
||||
FLAGS
|
||||
{value} -- contents of rom
|
||||
{object} ; -- objects of the datablock
|
||||
object:
|
||||
O_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
OFFSET -- offset within the datablock
|
||||
SIZE ; -- size of the object in bytes
|
||||
value:
|
||||
argument ;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
A data block has only one flag: "external", indicating
|
||||
whether the data label is externally visible.
|
||||
The syntax for "argument" will be given later on
|
||||
(see em_text).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The procedure table
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The procedure table contains global information
|
||||
about all procedures that are made available
|
||||
to the optimizer
|
||||
and that are needed by the EM program.
|
||||
(Library units may not be needed, see section 3.5).
|
||||
The table has one entry for
|
||||
every procedure.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(1i) l l.
|
||||
procedure_table:
|
||||
{procedure}
|
||||
procedure:
|
||||
P_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
#LABELS -- number of instruction labels
|
||||
#LOCALS -- number of bytes for locals
|
||||
#FORMALS -- number of bytes for formals
|
||||
FLAGS -- flag bits
|
||||
calling -- procedures called by this one
|
||||
change -- info about global variables changed
|
||||
use ; -- info about global variables used
|
||||
calling:
|
||||
{P_ID} ; -- procedures called
|
||||
change:
|
||||
ext -- external variables changed
|
||||
FLAGS ;
|
||||
use:
|
||||
FLAGS ;
|
||||
ext:
|
||||
{O_ID} ; -- a set of objects
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The number of bytes of formal parameters accessed by
|
||||
a procedure is determined by the front ends and
|
||||
passed via a message (parameter message) to the optimizer.
|
||||
If the front end is not able to determine this number
|
||||
(e.g. the parameter may be an array of dynamic size or
|
||||
the procedure may have a variable number of arguments) the attribute
|
||||
contains the value 'UNKNOWN_SIZE'.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
A procedure has the following flags:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
external: true if the proc. is externally visible
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
bodyseen: true if its code is available as EM text
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
calunknown: true if it calls a procedure that has its bodyseen
|
||||
flag not set
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
environ: true if it uses or changes a (non-global) variable in
|
||||
a lexically enclosing procedure
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
lpi: true if is used as operand of an lpi instruction, so
|
||||
it may be called indirect
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The change and use attributes both have one flag: "indirect",
|
||||
indicating whether the procedure does a 'use indirect'
|
||||
or a 'store indirect' (indirect means through a pointer).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The EM text
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The EM text contains the EM instructions.
|
||||
Every EM instruction has an operation code (opcode)
|
||||
and 0 or 1 operands.
|
||||
EM pseudo instructions can have more than
|
||||
1 operand.
|
||||
The opcode is just a small (8 bit) integer.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
There are several kinds of operands, which we will
|
||||
refer to as
|
||||
.UL types.
|
||||
Many EM instructions can have more than one type of operand.
|
||||
The types and their encodings in Compact Assembly Language
|
||||
are discussed extensively in.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.2]
|
||||
Of special interest is the way numeric values
|
||||
are represented.
|
||||
Of prime importance is the machine independency of
|
||||
the representation.
|
||||
Ultimately, one could store every integer
|
||||
just as a string of the characters '0' to '9'.
|
||||
As doing arithmetic on strings is awkward,
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language allows several alternatives.
|
||||
The main idea is to look at the value of the integer.
|
||||
Integers that fit in 16, 32 or 64 bits are
|
||||
represented as a row of resp. 2, 4 and 8 bytes,
|
||||
preceded by an indication of how many bytes are used.
|
||||
Longer integers are represented as strings;
|
||||
this is only allowed within pseudo instructions, however.
|
||||
This concept works very well for target machines
|
||||
with reasonable word sizes.
|
||||
At present, most ACK software cannot be used for word sizes
|
||||
higher than 32 bits,
|
||||
although the handles for using larger word sizes are
|
||||
present in the design of the EM code.
|
||||
In the intermediate code we essentially use the
|
||||
same ideas.
|
||||
We allow three representations of integers.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
integers that fit in a short are represented as a short
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
integers that fit in a long but not in a short are represented
|
||||
as longs
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
all remaining integers are represented as strings
|
||||
(only allowed in pseudos).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The terms short and long are defined in
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
ritchie reference manual programming language
|
||||
.], section 4]
|
||||
and depend only on the source machine
|
||||
(i.e. the machine on which ACK runs),
|
||||
not on the target machines.
|
||||
For historical reasons a long will often be called an
|
||||
.UL offset.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Operands can also be instruction labels,
|
||||
objects or procedures.
|
||||
Instruction labels are denoted by a
|
||||
.UL label
|
||||
.UL identifier,
|
||||
which can be distinguished from a normal identifier.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The operand of a pseudo instruction can be a list of
|
||||
.UL arguments.
|
||||
Arguments can have the same type as operands, except
|
||||
for the type short, which is not used for arguments.
|
||||
Furthermore, an argument can be a string or
|
||||
a string representation of a signed integer, unsigned integer
|
||||
or floating point number.
|
||||
If the number of arguments is not fully determined by
|
||||
the pseudo instruction (e.g. a ROM pseudo can have any number
|
||||
of arguments), then the list is terminated by a special
|
||||
argument of type CEND.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(1i) l l.
|
||||
em_text:
|
||||
{line} ;
|
||||
line:
|
||||
INSTR -- opcode
|
||||
OPTYPE -- operand type
|
||||
operand ;
|
||||
operand:
|
||||
empty | -- OPTYPE = NO
|
||||
SHORT | -- OPTYPE = SHORT
|
||||
OFFSET | -- OPTYPE = OFFSET
|
||||
LAB_ID | -- OPTYPE = INSTRLAB
|
||||
O_ID | -- OPTYPE = OBJECT
|
||||
P_ID | -- OPTYPE = PROCEDURE
|
||||
{argument} ; -- OPTYPE = LIST
|
||||
argument:
|
||||
ARGTYPE
|
||||
arg ;
|
||||
arg:
|
||||
empty | -- ARGTYPE = CEND
|
||||
OFFSET |
|
||||
LAB_ID |
|
||||
O_ID |
|
||||
P_ID |
|
||||
string | -- ARGTYPE = STRING
|
||||
const ; -- ARGTYPE = ICON,UCON or FCON
|
||||
string:
|
||||
LENGTH -- number of characters
|
||||
{CHARACTER} ;
|
||||
const:
|
||||
SIZE -- number of bytes
|
||||
string ; -- string representation of (un)signed
|
||||
-- or floating point constant
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The control flow graphs
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Each procedure can be divided
|
||||
into a number of basic blocks.
|
||||
A basic block is a piece of code with
|
||||
no jumps in, except at the beginning,
|
||||
and no jumps out, except at the end.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Every basic block has a set of
|
||||
.UL successors,
|
||||
which are basic blocks that can follow it immediately in
|
||||
the dynamic execution sequence.
|
||||
The
|
||||
.UL predecessors
|
||||
are the basic blocks of which this one
|
||||
is a successor.
|
||||
The successor and predecessor attributes
|
||||
of all basic blocks of a single procedure
|
||||
are said to form the
|
||||
.UL control
|
||||
.UL flow
|
||||
.UL graph
|
||||
of that procedure.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Another important attribute is the
|
||||
.UL immediate
|
||||
.UL dominator.
|
||||
A basic block B dominates a block C if
|
||||
every path in the graph from the procedure entry block
|
||||
to C goes through B.
|
||||
The immediate dominator of C is the closest dominator
|
||||
of C on any path from the entry block.
|
||||
(Note that the dominator relation is transitive,
|
||||
so the immediate dominator is well defined.)
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A basic block also has an attribute containing
|
||||
the identifiers of every
|
||||
.UL loop
|
||||
that the block belongs to (see next section for loops).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(1i) l l.
|
||||
control_flow_graph:
|
||||
{basic_block} ;
|
||||
basic_block:
|
||||
B_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
#INSTR -- number of EM instructions
|
||||
succ
|
||||
pred
|
||||
idom -- immediate dominator
|
||||
loops -- set of loops
|
||||
FLAGS ; -- flag bits
|
||||
succ:
|
||||
{B_ID} ;
|
||||
pred:
|
||||
{B_ID} ;
|
||||
idom:
|
||||
B_ID ;
|
||||
loops:
|
||||
{LP_ID} ;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The flag bits can have the values 'firm' and 'strong',
|
||||
which are explained below.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The loop tables
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Every procedure has an associated
|
||||
.UL loop
|
||||
.UL table
|
||||
containing information about all the loops
|
||||
in the procedure.
|
||||
Loops can be detected by a close inspection of
|
||||
the control flow graph.
|
||||
The main idea is to look for two basic blocks,
|
||||
B and C, for which the following holds:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
B is a successor of C
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
B is a dominator of C
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
B is called the loop
|
||||
.UL entry
|
||||
and C is called the loop
|
||||
.UL end.
|
||||
Intuitively, C contains a jump backwards to
|
||||
the beginning of the loop (B).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A loop L1 is said to be
|
||||
.UL nested
|
||||
within loop L2 if all basic blocks of L1
|
||||
are also part of L2.
|
||||
It is important to note that loops could
|
||||
originally be written as a well structured for -or
|
||||
while loop or as a messy goto loop.
|
||||
Hence loops may partly overlap without one
|
||||
being nested inside the other.
|
||||
The
|
||||
.UL nesting
|
||||
.UL level
|
||||
of a loop is the number of loops in
|
||||
which it is nested (so it is 0 for
|
||||
an outermost loop).
|
||||
The details of loop detection will be discussed later.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
It is often desirable to know whether a
|
||||
basic block gets executed during every iteration
|
||||
of a loop.
|
||||
This leads to the following definitions:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A basic block B of a loop L is said to be a \fIfirm\fR block
|
||||
of L if B is executed on all successive iterations of L,
|
||||
with the only possible exception of the last iteration.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A basic block B of a loop L is said to be a \fIstrong\fR block
|
||||
of L if B is executed on all successive iterations of L.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that a strong block is also a firm block.
|
||||
If a block is part of a conditional statement, it is neither
|
||||
strong nor firm, as it may be skipped during some iterations
|
||||
(see Fig. 3.2).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
loop
|
||||
if cond1 then
|
||||
... \kx-- this code will not
|
||||
\h'|\nxu'-- result in a firm or strong block
|
||||
end if;
|
||||
... -- strong (always executed)
|
||||
exit when cond2;
|
||||
... \kx-- firm (not executed on last iteration).
|
||||
end loop;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 3.2 Example of firm and strong block
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(1i) l l.
|
||||
looptable:
|
||||
{loop} ;
|
||||
loop:
|
||||
LP_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
LEVEL -- loop nesting level
|
||||
entry -- loop entry block
|
||||
end ;
|
||||
entry:
|
||||
B_ID ;
|
||||
end:
|
||||
B_ID ;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
|
@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
External representation of the intermediate code
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The syntax of the intermediate code was given
|
||||
in the previous section.
|
||||
In this section we will make some remarks about
|
||||
the representation of the code in sequential files.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
We use sequential files in order to avoid
|
||||
the bookkeeping of complex file indices.
|
||||
As a consequence of this decision
|
||||
we can't store all components
|
||||
of the intermediate code
|
||||
in one file.
|
||||
If a phase wishes to change some attribute
|
||||
of a procedure,
|
||||
or wants to add or delete entire procedures
|
||||
(inline substitution may do the latter),
|
||||
the procedure table will only be fully updated
|
||||
after the entire EM text has been scanned.
|
||||
Yet, the next phase undoubtedly wants
|
||||
to read the procedure table before it
|
||||
starts working on the EM text.
|
||||
Hence there is an ordering problem, which
|
||||
can be solved easily by putting the
|
||||
procedure table in a separate file.
|
||||
Similarly, the data block table is kept
|
||||
in a file of its own.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The control flow graphs (CFGs) could be mixed
|
||||
with the EM text.
|
||||
Rather, we have chosen to put them
|
||||
in a separate file too.
|
||||
The control flow graph file should be regarded as a
|
||||
file that imposes some structure on the EM-text file,
|
||||
just as an overhead sheet containing a picture
|
||||
of a Flow Chart may be put on an overhead sheet
|
||||
containing statements.
|
||||
The loop tables are also put in the CFG file.
|
||||
A loop imposes an extra structure on the
|
||||
CFGs and hence on the EM text.
|
||||
So there are four files:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the EM-text file
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the procedure table file
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the object table file
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the CFG and loop tables file
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Every table is preceded by its length, in order to
|
||||
tell where it ends.
|
||||
The CFG file also contains the number of instructions of
|
||||
every basic block,
|
||||
indicating which part of the EM text belongs
|
||||
to that block.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(1i) l l.
|
||||
intermediate_code:
|
||||
object_table_file
|
||||
proctable_file
|
||||
em_text_file
|
||||
cfg_file ;
|
||||
object_table_file:
|
||||
LENGTH -- number of objects
|
||||
object_table ;
|
||||
proctable_file:
|
||||
LENGTH -- number of procedures
|
||||
procedure_table ;
|
||||
em_text_file:
|
||||
em_text ;
|
||||
cfg_file:
|
||||
{per_proc} ; -- one for every procedure
|
||||
per_proc:
|
||||
BLENGTH -- number of basic blocks
|
||||
LLENGTH -- number of loops
|
||||
control_flow_graph
|
||||
looptable ;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
166
doc/ego/ic/ic5
166
doc/ego/ic/ic5
|
@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
The Intermediate Code construction phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The first phase of the global optimizer,
|
||||
called
|
||||
.UL IC,
|
||||
constructs a major part of the intermediate code.
|
||||
To be specific, it produces:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the EM text
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the object table
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
part of the procedure table
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The calling, change and use attributes of a procedure
|
||||
and all its flags except the external and bodyseen flags
|
||||
are computed by the next phase (Control Flow phase).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As explained before,
|
||||
the intermediate code does not contain
|
||||
any names of variables or procedures.
|
||||
The normal identifiers are replaced by identifying
|
||||
numbers.
|
||||
Yet, the output of the global optimizer must
|
||||
contain normal identifiers, as this
|
||||
output is in Compact Assembly Language format.
|
||||
We certainly want all externally visible names
|
||||
to be the same in the input as in the output,
|
||||
because the optimized EM module may be a library unit,
|
||||
used by other modules.
|
||||
IC dumps the names of all procedures and data labels
|
||||
on two files:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the procedure dump file, containing tuples (P_ID, procedure name)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the data dump file, containing tuples (D_ID, data label name)
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The names of instruction labels are not dumped,
|
||||
as they are not visible outside the procedure
|
||||
in which they are defined.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The input to IC consists of one or more files.
|
||||
Each file is either an EM module in Compact Assembly Language
|
||||
format, or a Unix archive file (library) containing such modules.
|
||||
IC only extracts those modules from a library that are
|
||||
needed somehow, just as a linker does.
|
||||
It is advisable to present as much code
|
||||
of the EM program as possible to the optimizer,
|
||||
although it is not required to present the whole program.
|
||||
If a procedure is called somewhere in the EM text,
|
||||
but its body (text) is not included in the input,
|
||||
its bodyseen flag in the procedure table will still
|
||||
be off.
|
||||
Whenever such a procedure is called,
|
||||
we assume the worst case for everything;
|
||||
it will change and use all variables it has access to,
|
||||
it will call every procedure etc.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Similarly, if a data label is used
|
||||
but not defined, the PSEUDO attribute in its data block
|
||||
will be set to UNKNOWN.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Part of the code for the EM Peephole Optimizer
|
||||
.[
|
||||
staveren peephole toplass
|
||||
.]
|
||||
has been used for IC.
|
||||
Especially the routines that read and unravel
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language and the identifier
|
||||
lookup mechanism have been used.
|
||||
New code was added to recognize objects,
|
||||
build the object and procedure tables and to
|
||||
output the intermediate code.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
IC uses singly linked linear lists for both the
|
||||
procedure and object table.
|
||||
Hence there are no limits on the size of such
|
||||
a table (except for the trivial fact that it must fit
|
||||
in main memory).
|
||||
Both tables are outputted after all EM code has
|
||||
been processed.
|
||||
IC reads the EM text of one entire procedure
|
||||
at a time,
|
||||
processes it and appends the modified code to
|
||||
the EM text file.
|
||||
EM code is represented internally as a doubly linked linear
|
||||
list of EM instructions.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Objects are recognized by looking at the operands
|
||||
of instructions that reference global data.
|
||||
If we come across the instructions:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l.
|
||||
LDE X+6 -- Load Double External
|
||||
LAE X+20 -- Load Address External
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
we conclude that the data block
|
||||
preceded by the data label X contains an object
|
||||
at offset 6 of size twice the word size,
|
||||
and an object at offset 20 of unknown size.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
A data block entry of the object table is allocated
|
||||
at the first reference to a data label.
|
||||
If this reference is a defining occurrence
|
||||
or a INA pseudo instruction,
|
||||
the label is not externally visible
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.1.4.3]
|
||||
In this case, the external flag of the data block
|
||||
is turned off.
|
||||
If the first reference is an applied occurrence
|
||||
or a EXA pseudo instruction, the flag is set.
|
||||
We record this information, because the
|
||||
optimizer may change the order of defining and
|
||||
applied occurrences.
|
||||
The INA and EXA pseudos are removed from the EM text.
|
||||
They may be regenerated by the last phase
|
||||
of the optimizer.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Similar rules hold for the procedure table
|
||||
and the INP and EXP pseudos.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Source files of IC
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The source files of IC consist
|
||||
of the files ic.c, ic.h and several packages.
|
||||
.UL ic.h
|
||||
contains type definitions, macros and
|
||||
variable declarations that may be used by
|
||||
ic.c and by every package.
|
||||
.UL ic.c
|
||||
contains the definitions of these variables,
|
||||
the procedure
|
||||
.UL main
|
||||
and some high level I/O routines used by main.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Every package xxx consists of two files.
|
||||
ic_xxx.h contains type definitions,
|
||||
macros, variable declarations and
|
||||
procedure declarations that may be used by
|
||||
every .c file that includes this .h file.
|
||||
The file ic_xxx.c provides the
|
||||
definitions of these variables and
|
||||
the implementation of the declared procedures.
|
||||
IC uses the following packages:
|
||||
.IP lookup: 18
|
||||
procedures that loop up procedure, data label
|
||||
and instruction label names; procedures to dump
|
||||
the procedure and data label names.
|
||||
.IP lib:
|
||||
one procedure that gets the next useful input module;
|
||||
while scanning archives, it skips unnecessary modules.
|
||||
.IP aux:
|
||||
several auxiliary routines.
|
||||
.IP io:
|
||||
low-level I/O routines that unravel the Compact
|
||||
Assembly Language.
|
||||
.IP put:
|
||||
routines that output the intermediate code
|
||||
.LP
|
|
@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
|
|||
il1
|
||||
il2
|
||||
il3
|
||||
il4
|
||||
il5
|
||||
il6
|
112
doc/ego/il/il1
112
doc/ego/il/il1
|
@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Inline substitution
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Inline Substitution technique (IL)
|
||||
tries to decrease the overhead associated
|
||||
with procedure calls (invocations).
|
||||
During a procedure call, several actions
|
||||
must be undertaken to set up the right
|
||||
environment for the called procedure.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
johnson calling sequence
|
||||
.]
|
||||
On return from the procedure, most of these
|
||||
effects must be undone.
|
||||
This entire process introduces significant
|
||||
costs in execution time as well as
|
||||
in object code size.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The inline substitution technique replaces
|
||||
some of the calls by the modified body of
|
||||
the called procedure, hence eliminating
|
||||
the overhead.
|
||||
Furthermore, as the calling and called procedure
|
||||
are now integrated, they can be optimized
|
||||
together, using other techniques of the optimizer.
|
||||
This often leads to extra opportunities for
|
||||
optimization
|
||||
.[
|
||||
ball predicting effects
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
carter code generation cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
scheifler inline cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An inline substitution of a call to a procedure P increases
|
||||
the size of the program, unless P is very small or P is
|
||||
called only once.
|
||||
In the latter case, P can be eliminated.
|
||||
In practice, procedures that are called only once occur
|
||||
quite frequently, due to the
|
||||
introduction of structured programming.
|
||||
(Carter
|
||||
.[
|
||||
carter umi ann arbor
|
||||
.]
|
||||
states that almost 50% of the Pascal procedures
|
||||
he analyzed were called just once).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Scheifler
|
||||
.[
|
||||
scheifler inline cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
has a more general view of inline substitution.
|
||||
In his model, the program under consideration is
|
||||
allowed to grow by a certain amount,
|
||||
i.e. code size is sacrificed to speed up the program.
|
||||
The above two cases are just special cases of
|
||||
his model, obtained by setting the size-change to
|
||||
(approximately) zero.
|
||||
He formulates the substitution problem as follows:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
"Given a program, a subset of all invocations,
|
||||
a maximum program size, and a maximum procedure size,
|
||||
find a sequence of substitutions that minimizes
|
||||
the expected execution time."
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Scheifler shows that this problem is NP-complete
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho hopcroft ullman analysis algorithms
|
||||
.], chapter 10]
|
||||
by reduction to the Knapsack Problem.
|
||||
Heuristics will have to be used to find a near-optimal
|
||||
solution.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the following chapters we will extend
|
||||
Scheifler's view and adapt it to the EM Global Optimizer.
|
||||
We will first describe the transformations that have
|
||||
to be applied to the EM text when a call is substituted
|
||||
in line.
|
||||
Next we will examine in which cases inline substitution
|
||||
is not possible or desirable.
|
||||
Heuristics will be developed for
|
||||
chosing a good sequence of substitutions.
|
||||
These heuristics make no demand on the user
|
||||
(such as making profiles
|
||||
.[
|
||||
scheifler inline cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
or giving pragmats
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
ichbiah ada military standard
|
||||
.], section 6.3.2]),
|
||||
although the model could easily be extended
|
||||
to use such information.
|
||||
Finally, we will discuss the implementation
|
||||
of the IL phase of the optimizer.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We will often use the term inline expansion
|
||||
as a synonym of inline substitution.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The inverse technique of procedure abstraction
|
||||
(automatic subroutine generation)
|
||||
.[
|
||||
shaffer subroutine generation
|
||||
.]
|
||||
will not be discussed in this report.
|
|
@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Parameters and local variables.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the EM calling sequence, the calling procedure
|
||||
pushes its parameters on the stack
|
||||
before doing the CAL.
|
||||
The called routine first saves some
|
||||
status information on the stack and then
|
||||
allocates space for its own locals
|
||||
(also on the stack).
|
||||
Usually, one special purpose register,
|
||||
the Local Base (LB) register,
|
||||
is used to access both the locals and the
|
||||
parameters.
|
||||
If memory is highly segmented,
|
||||
the stack frames of the caller and the callee
|
||||
may be allocated in different fragments;
|
||||
an extra Argument Base (AB) register is used
|
||||
in this case to access the actual parameters.
|
||||
See 4.2 of
|
||||
.[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.]
|
||||
for further details.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If a procedure call is expanded in line,
|
||||
there are two problems:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
No stack frame will be allocated for the called procedure;
|
||||
we must find another place to put its locals.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
The LB register cannot be used to access the actual
|
||||
parameters;
|
||||
as the CAL instruction is deleted, the LB will
|
||||
still point to the local base of the \fIcalling\fR procedure.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The local variables of the called procedure will
|
||||
be put in the stack frame of the calling procedure,
|
||||
just after its own locals.
|
||||
The size of the stack frame of the
|
||||
calling procedure will be increased
|
||||
during its entire lifetime.
|
||||
Therefore our model will allow a
|
||||
limit to be set on the number of bytes
|
||||
for locals that the called procedure may have
|
||||
(see next section).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are several alternatives to access the parameters.
|
||||
An actual parameter may be any auxiliary expression,
|
||||
which we will refer to as
|
||||
the \fIactual parameter expression\fR.
|
||||
The value of this expression is stored
|
||||
in a location on the stack (see above),
|
||||
the \fIparameter location\fR.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The alternatives for accessing parameters are:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
save the value of the stackpointer at the point of the CAL
|
||||
in a temporary variable X;
|
||||
this variable can be used to simulate the AB register, i.e.
|
||||
parameter locations are accessed via an offset to
|
||||
the value of X.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
create a new temporary local variable T for
|
||||
the parameter (in the stack frame of the caller);
|
||||
every access to the parameter location must be changed
|
||||
into an access to T.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
do not evaluate the actual parameter expression before the call;
|
||||
instead, substitute this expression for every use of the
|
||||
parameter location.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The first method may be expensive if X is not
|
||||
put in a register.
|
||||
We will not use this method.
|
||||
The time required to evaluate and access the
|
||||
parameters when the second method is used
|
||||
will not differ much from the normal
|
||||
calling sequence (i.e. not in line call).
|
||||
It is not expensive, but there are no
|
||||
extra savings either.
|
||||
The third method is essentially the 'by name'
|
||||
parameter mechanism of Algol60.
|
||||
If the actual parameter is just a numeric constant,
|
||||
it is advantageous to use it.
|
||||
Yet, there are several circumstances
|
||||
under which it cannot or should not be used.
|
||||
We will deal with this in the next section.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
In general we will use the third method,
|
||||
if it is possible and desirable.
|
||||
Such parameters will be called \fIin line parameters\fR.
|
||||
In all other cases we will use the second method.
|
164
doc/ego/il/il3
164
doc/ego/il/il3
|
@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Feasibility and desirability analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Feasibility and desirability analysis
|
||||
of in line substitution differ
|
||||
somewhat from most other techniques.
|
||||
Usually, much effort is needed to find
|
||||
a feasible opportunity for optimization
|
||||
(e.g. a redundant subexpression).
|
||||
Desirability analysis then checks
|
||||
if it is really advantageous to do
|
||||
the optimization.
|
||||
For IL, opportunities are easy to find.
|
||||
To see if an in line expansion is
|
||||
desirable will not be hard either.
|
||||
Yet, the main problem is to find the most
|
||||
desirable ones.
|
||||
We will deal with this problem later and
|
||||
we will first attend feasibility and
|
||||
desirability analysis.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are several reasons why a procedure invocation
|
||||
cannot or should not be expanded in line.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
A call to a procedure P cannot be expanded in line
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
The body of P is not available as EM text.
|
||||
Clearly, there is no way to do the substitution.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
follows the chain of statically enclosing
|
||||
procedures (via a LXL or LXA instruction)
|
||||
or follows the chain of dynamically enclosing
|
||||
procedures (via a DCH).
|
||||
If the call were expanded in line,
|
||||
one level would be removed from the chains,
|
||||
leading to total chaos.
|
||||
This chaos could be solved by patching up
|
||||
every LXL, LXA or DCH in all procedures
|
||||
that could be part of the chains,
|
||||
but this is hard to implement.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
calls a procedure whose body is not
|
||||
available as EM text.
|
||||
The unknown procedure may use an LXL, LXA or DCH.
|
||||
However, in several languages a separately
|
||||
compiled procedure has no access to the
|
||||
static or dynamic chain.
|
||||
In this case
|
||||
this point does not apply.
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
uses the LPB instruction, which converts a
|
||||
local base to an argument base;
|
||||
as the locals and parameters are stored
|
||||
in a non-standard way (differing from the
|
||||
normal EM calling sequence) this instruction
|
||||
would yield incorrect results.
|
||||
.IP 5.
|
||||
The total number of bytes of the parameters
|
||||
of P is not known.
|
||||
P may be a procedure with a variable number
|
||||
of parameters or may have an array of dynamic size
|
||||
as value parameter.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
It is undesirable to expand a call to a procedure P in line
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
P is large, i.e. the number of EM instructions
|
||||
of P exceeds some threshold.
|
||||
The expanded code would be large too.
|
||||
Furthermore, several programs in ACK,
|
||||
including the global optimizer itself,
|
||||
may run out of memory if they they have to run
|
||||
in a small address space and are provided
|
||||
very large procedures.
|
||||
The threshold may be set to infinite,
|
||||
in which case this point does not apply.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P has many local variables.
|
||||
All these variables would have to be allocated
|
||||
in the stack frame of the calling procedure.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If a call may be expanded in line, we have to
|
||||
decide how to access its parameters.
|
||||
In the previous section we stated that we would
|
||||
use in line parameters whenever possible and desirable.
|
||||
There are several reasons why a parameter
|
||||
cannot or should not be expanded in line.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
No parameter of a procedure P can be expanded in line,
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
does a store-indirect or a use-indirect (i.e. through
|
||||
a pointer).
|
||||
However, if the front-end has generated messages
|
||||
telling that certain parameters can not be accessed
|
||||
indirectly, those parameters may be expanded in line.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
calls a procedure whose body is not available as EM text.
|
||||
The unknown procedure may do a store-indirect
|
||||
or a use-indirect.
|
||||
However, the same remark about front-end messages
|
||||
as for 1. holds here.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The address of a parameter location is taken (via a LAL).
|
||||
In the normal calling sequence, all parameters
|
||||
are stored sequentially. If the address of one
|
||||
parameter location is taken, the address of any
|
||||
other parameter location can be computed from it.
|
||||
Hence we must put every parameter in a temporary location;
|
||||
furthermore, all these locations must be in
|
||||
the same order as for the normal calling sequence.
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
P has overlapping parameters; for example, it uses
|
||||
the parameter at offset 10 both as a 2 byte and as a 4 byte
|
||||
parameter.
|
||||
Such code may be produced by the front ends if
|
||||
the formal parameter is of some record type
|
||||
with variants.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Sometimes a specific parameter must not be expanded in line.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
An actual parameter expression cannot be expanded in line
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
P stores into the parameter location.
|
||||
Even if the actual parameter expression is a simple
|
||||
variable, it is incorrect to change the 'store into
|
||||
formal' into a 'store into actual', because of
|
||||
the parameter mechanism used.
|
||||
In Pascal, the following expansion is incorrect:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
procedure p (x:integer);
|
||||
begin
|
||||
x := 20;
|
||||
end;
|
||||
\&...
|
||||
a := 10; \kxa := 10;
|
||||
p(a); ---> \h'|\nxu'a := 20;
|
||||
write(a); \h'|\nxu'write(a);
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P changes any of the operands of the
|
||||
actual parameter expression.
|
||||
If the expression is expanded and evaluated
|
||||
after the operand has been changed,
|
||||
the wrong value will be used.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The actual parameter expression has side effects.
|
||||
It must be evaluated only once,
|
||||
at the place of the call.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
It is undesirable to expand an actual parameter in line
|
||||
in the following case:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
The parameter is used more than once
|
||||
(dynamically) and the actual parameter expression
|
||||
is not just a simple variable or constant.
|
||||
.LP
|
135
doc/ego/il/il4
135
doc/ego/il/il4
|
@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Heuristic rules
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Using the information described
|
||||
in the previous section,
|
||||
we can find all calls that can
|
||||
be expanded in line, and for which
|
||||
this expansion is desirable.
|
||||
In general, we cannot expand all these calls,
|
||||
so we have to choose the 'best' ones.
|
||||
With every CAL instruction
|
||||
that may be expanded, we associate
|
||||
a \fIpay off\fR,
|
||||
which expresses how desirable it is
|
||||
to expand this specific CAL.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Let Tc denote the portion of EM text involved
|
||||
in a specific call, i.e. the pushing of the actual
|
||||
parameter expressions, the CAL itself,
|
||||
the popping of the parameters and the
|
||||
pushing of the result (if any, via an LFR).
|
||||
Let Te denote the EM text that would be obtained
|
||||
by expanding the call in line.
|
||||
Let Pc be the original program and Pe the program
|
||||
with Te substituted for Tc.
|
||||
The pay off of the CAL depends on two factors:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
T = execution_time(Pe) - execution_time(Pc)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
S = code_size(Pe) - code_size(Pc)
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The change in execution time (T) depends on:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
T1 = execution_time(Te) - execution_time(Tc)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
N = number of times Te or Tc get executed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
We assume that T1 will be the same every
|
||||
time the code gets executed.
|
||||
This is a reasonable assumption.
|
||||
(Note that we are talking about one CAL,
|
||||
not about different calls to the same procedure).
|
||||
Hence
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
T = N * T1
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
T1 can be estimated by a careful analysis
|
||||
of the transformations that are performed.
|
||||
Below, we list everything that will be
|
||||
different when a call is expanded in line:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The CAL instruction is not executed.
|
||||
This saves a subroutine jump.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The instructions in the procedure prolog
|
||||
are not executed.
|
||||
These instructions, generated from the PRO pseudo,
|
||||
save some machine registers
|
||||
(including the old LB), set the new LB and allocate space
|
||||
for the locals of the called routine.
|
||||
The savings may be less if there are no
|
||||
locals to allocate.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
In line parameters are not evaluated before the call
|
||||
and are not pushed on the stack.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
All remaining parameters are stored in local variables,
|
||||
instead of being pushed on the stack.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
If the number of parameters is nonzero,
|
||||
the ASP instruction after the CAL is not executed.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Every reference to an in line parameter is
|
||||
substituted by the parameter expression.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
RET (return) instructions are replaced by
|
||||
BRA (branch) instructions.
|
||||
If the called procedure 'falls through'
|
||||
(i.e. it has only one RET, at the end of its code),
|
||||
even the BRA is not needed.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The LFR (fetch function result) is not executed
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Besides these changes, which are caused directly by IL,
|
||||
other changes may occur as IL influences other optimization
|
||||
techniques, such as Register Allocation and Constant Propagation.
|
||||
Our heuristic rules do not take into account the quite
|
||||
inpredictable effects on Register Allocation.
|
||||
It does, however, favour calls that have numeric \fIconstants\fR
|
||||
as parameter; especially the constant "0" as an inline
|
||||
parameter gets high scores,
|
||||
as further optimizations may often be possible.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
It cannot be determined statically how often a CAL instruction gets
|
||||
executed.
|
||||
We will use \fIloop nesting\fR information here.
|
||||
The nesting level of the loop in which
|
||||
the CAL appears (if any) will be used as an
|
||||
indication for the number of times it gets executed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Based on all these facts,
|
||||
the pay off of a call will be computed.
|
||||
The following model was developed empirically.
|
||||
Assume procedure P calls procedure Q.
|
||||
The call takes place in basic block B.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
l l l.
|
||||
ZP \&= # zero parameters
|
||||
CP \&= # constant parameters - ZP
|
||||
LN \&= Loop Nesting level (0 if outside any loop)
|
||||
F \&= \fIif\fR # formal parameters of Q > 0 \fIthen\fR 1 \fIelse\fR 0
|
||||
FT \&= \fIif\fR Q falls through \fIthen\fR 1 \fIelse\fR 0
|
||||
S \&= size(Q) - 1 - # inline_parameters - F
|
||||
L \&= \fIif\fR # local variables of P > 0 \fIthen\fR 0 \fIelse\fR -1
|
||||
A \&= CP + 2 * ZP
|
||||
N \&= \fIif\fR LN=0 and P is never called from a loop \fIthen\fR 0 \fIelse\fR (LN+1)**2
|
||||
FM \&= \fIif\fR B is a firm block \fIthen\fR 2 \fIelse\fR 1
|
||||
|
||||
pay_off \&= (100/S + FT + F + L + A) * N * FM
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
S stands for the size increase of the program,
|
||||
which is slightly less than the size of Q.
|
||||
The size of a procedure is taken to be its number
|
||||
of (non-pseudo) EM instructions.
|
||||
The terms "loop nesting level" and "firm" were defined
|
||||
in the chapter on the Intermediate Code (section "loop tables").
|
||||
If a call is not inside a loop and the calling procedure
|
||||
is itself never called from a loop (transitively),
|
||||
then the call will probably be executed at most once.
|
||||
Such a call is never expanded in line (its pay off is zero).
|
||||
If the calling procedure doesn't have local variables, a penalty (L)
|
||||
is introduced, as it will most likely get local variables if the
|
||||
call gets expanded.
|
446
doc/ego/il/il5
446
doc/ego/il/il5
|
@ -1,446 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A major factor in the implementation
|
||||
of Inline Substitution is the requirement
|
||||
not to use an excessive amount of memory.
|
||||
IL essentially analyzes the entire program;
|
||||
it makes decisions based on which procedure calls
|
||||
appear in the whole program.
|
||||
Yet, because of the memory restriction, it is
|
||||
not feasible to read the entire program
|
||||
in main memory.
|
||||
To solve this problem, the IL phase has been
|
||||
split up into three subphases that are executed sequentially:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
analyze every procedure; see how it accesses its parameters;
|
||||
simultaneously collect all calls
|
||||
appearing in the whole program an put them
|
||||
in a \fIcall-list\fR.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
use the call-list and decide which calls will be substituted
|
||||
in line.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
take the decisions of subphase 2 and modify the
|
||||
program accordingly.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Subphases 1 and 3 scan the input program; only
|
||||
subphase 3 modifies it.
|
||||
It is essential that the decisions can be made
|
||||
in subphase 2
|
||||
without using the input program,
|
||||
provided that subphase 1 puts enough information
|
||||
in the call-list.
|
||||
Subphase 2 keeps the entire call-list in main memory
|
||||
and repeatedly scans it, to
|
||||
find the next best candidate for expansion.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We will specify the
|
||||
data structures used by IL before
|
||||
describing the subphases.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Data structures
|
||||
.NH 4
|
||||
The procedure table
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In subphase 1 information is gathered about every procedure
|
||||
and added to the procedure table.
|
||||
This information is used by the heuristic rules.
|
||||
A proctable entry for procedure p has
|
||||
the following extra information:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
is it allowed to substitute an invocation of p in line?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
is it allowed to put any parameter of such a call in line?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the size of p (number of EM instructions)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
does p 'fall through'?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
a description of the formal parameters that p accesses; this information
|
||||
is obtained by looking at the code of p. For every parameter f,
|
||||
we record:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the offset of f
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the type of f (word, double word, pointer)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
may the corresponding actual parameter be put in line?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
is f ever accessed indirectly?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
if f used: never, once or more than once?
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the number of times p is called (see below)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the file address of its call-count information (see below).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.NH 4
|
||||
Call-count information
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As a result of Inline Substitution, some procedures may
|
||||
become useless, because all their invocations have been
|
||||
substituted in line.
|
||||
One of the tasks of IL is to keep track which
|
||||
procedures are no longer called.
|
||||
Note that IL is especially keen on procedures that are
|
||||
called only once
|
||||
(possibly as a result of expanding all other calls to it).
|
||||
So we want to know how many times a procedure
|
||||
is called \fIduring\fR Inline Substitution.
|
||||
It is not good enough to compute this
|
||||
information afterwards.
|
||||
The task is rather complex, because
|
||||
the number of times a procedure is called
|
||||
varies during the entire process:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
If a call to p is substituted in line,
|
||||
the number of calls to p gets decremented by 1.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
If a call to p is substituted in line,
|
||||
and p contains n calls to q, then the number of calls to q
|
||||
gets incremented by n.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
If a procedure p is removed (because it is no
|
||||
longer called) and p contains n calls to q,
|
||||
then the number of calls to q gets decremented by n.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
(Note that p may be the same as q, if p is recursive).
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
So we actually want to have the following information:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
NRCALL(p,q) = number of call to q appearing in p,
|
||||
|
||||
for all procedures p and q that may be put in line.
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
This information, called \fIcall-count information\fR is
|
||||
computed by the first subphase.
|
||||
It is stored in a file.
|
||||
It is represented as a number of lists, rather than as
|
||||
a (very sparse) matrix.
|
||||
Every procedure has a list of (proc,count) pairs,
|
||||
telling which procedures it calls, and how many times.
|
||||
The file address of its call-count list is stored
|
||||
in its proctable entry.
|
||||
Whenever this information is needed, it is fetched from
|
||||
the file, using direct access.
|
||||
The proctable entry also contains the number of times
|
||||
a procedure is called, at any moment.
|
||||
.NH 4
|
||||
The call-list
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The call-list is the major data structure use by IL.
|
||||
Every item of the list describes one procedure call.
|
||||
It contains the following attributes:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the calling procedure (caller)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the called procedure (callee)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
identification of the CAL instruction (sequence number)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the loop nesting level; our heuristic rules appreciate
|
||||
calls inside a loop (or even inside a loop nested inside
|
||||
another loop, etc.) more than other calls
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the actual parameter expressions involved in the call;
|
||||
for every actual, we record:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the EM code of the expression
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the number of bytes of its result (size)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
an indication if the actual may be put in line
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The structure of the call-list is rather complex.
|
||||
Whenever a call is expanded in line, new calls
|
||||
will suddenly appear in the program,
|
||||
that were not contained in the original body
|
||||
of the calling subroutine.
|
||||
These calls are inherited from the called procedure.
|
||||
We will refer to these invocations as \fInested calls\fR
|
||||
(see Fig. 5.1).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(2.5i) l.
|
||||
procedure p is
|
||||
begin .
|
||||
a(); .
|
||||
b(); .
|
||||
end;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(2.5i) l.
|
||||
procedure r is procedure r is
|
||||
begin begin
|
||||
x(); x();
|
||||
p(); -- in line a(); -- nested call
|
||||
y(); b(); -- nested call
|
||||
end; y();
|
||||
end;
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 5.1 Example of nested procedure calls
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Nested calls may subsequently be put in line too
|
||||
(probably resulting in a yet deeper nesting level, etc.).
|
||||
So the call-list does not always reflect the source program,
|
||||
but changes dynamically, as decisions are made.
|
||||
If a call to p is expanded, all calls appearing in p
|
||||
will be added to the call-list.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
A convenient and elegant way to represent
|
||||
the call-list is to use a LISP-like list.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
poel lisp trac
|
||||
.]
|
||||
Calls that appear at the same level
|
||||
are linked in the CDR direction. If a call C
|
||||
to a procedure p is expanded,
|
||||
all calls appearing in p are put in a sub-list
|
||||
of C, i.e. in its CAR.
|
||||
In the example above, before the decision
|
||||
to expand the call to p is made, the
|
||||
call-list of procedure r looks like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(call-to-x, call-to-p, call-to-y)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
After the decision, it looks like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(call-to-x, (call-to-p*, call-to-a, call-to-b), call-to-y)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The call to p is marked, because it has been
|
||||
substituted.
|
||||
Whenever IL wants to traverse the call-list of some procedure,
|
||||
it uses the well-known LISP technique of
|
||||
recursion in the CAR direction and
|
||||
iteration in the CDR direction
|
||||
(see page 1.19-2 of
|
||||
.[
|
||||
poel lisp trac
|
||||
.]
|
||||
).
|
||||
All list traversals look like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
traverse(list)
|
||||
{
|
||||
for (c = first(list); c != 0; c = CDR(c)) {
|
||||
if (c is marked) {
|
||||
traverse(CAR(c));
|
||||
} else {
|
||||
do something with c
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The entire call-list consists of a number of LISP-like lists,
|
||||
one for every procedure.
|
||||
The proctable entry of a procedure contains a pointer
|
||||
to the beginning of the list.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The first subphase: procedure analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The tasks of the first subphase are to determine
|
||||
several attributes of every procedure
|
||||
and to construct the basic call-list,
|
||||
i.e. without nested calls.
|
||||
The size of a procedure is determined
|
||||
by simply counting its EM instructions.
|
||||
Pseudo instructions are skipped.
|
||||
A procedure does not 'fall through' if its CFG
|
||||
contains a basic block
|
||||
that is not the last block of the CFG and
|
||||
that ends on a RET instruction.
|
||||
The formal parameters of a procedure are determined
|
||||
by inspection of
|
||||
its code.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The call-list in constructed by looking at all CAL instructions
|
||||
appearing in the program.
|
||||
The call-list should only contain calls to procedures
|
||||
that may be put in line.
|
||||
This fact is only known if the procedure was
|
||||
analyzed earlier.
|
||||
If a call to a procedure p appears in the program
|
||||
before the body of p,
|
||||
the call will always be put in the call-list.
|
||||
If p is later found to be unsuitable,
|
||||
the call will be removed from the list by the
|
||||
second subphase.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An important issue is the recognition
|
||||
of the actual parameter expressions of the call.
|
||||
The front ends produces messages telling how many
|
||||
bytes of formal parameters every procedure accesses.
|
||||
(If there is no such message for a procedure, it
|
||||
cannot be put in line).
|
||||
The actual parameters together must account for
|
||||
the same number of bytes.A recursive descent parser is used
|
||||
to parse side-effect free EM expressions.
|
||||
It uses a table and some
|
||||
auxiliary routines to determine
|
||||
how many bytes every EM instruction pops from the stack
|
||||
and how many bytes it pushes onto the stack.
|
||||
These numbers depend on the EM instruction, its argument,
|
||||
and the wordsize and pointersize of the target machine.
|
||||
Initially, the parser has to recognize the
|
||||
number of bytes specified in the formals-message,
|
||||
say N.
|
||||
Assume the first instruction before the CAL pops S bytes
|
||||
and pushes R bytes.
|
||||
If R > N, too many bytes are recognized
|
||||
and the parser fails.
|
||||
Else, it calls itself recursively to recognize the
|
||||
S bytes used as operand of the instruction.
|
||||
If it succeeds in doing so, it continues with the next instruction,
|
||||
i.e. the first instruction before the code recognized by
|
||||
the recursive call, to recognize N-R more bytes.
|
||||
The result is a number of EM instructions that collectively push N bytes.
|
||||
If an instruction is come across that has side-effects
|
||||
(e.g. a store or a procedure call) or of which R and S cannot
|
||||
be computed statically (e.g. a LOS), it fails.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
Note that the parser traverses the code backwards.
|
||||
As EM code is essentially postfix code, the parser works top down.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If the parser fails to recognize the parameters, the call will not
|
||||
be substituted in line.
|
||||
If the parameters can be determined, they still have to
|
||||
match the formal parameters of the called procedure.
|
||||
This check is performed by the second subphase; it cannot be
|
||||
done here, because it is possible that the called
|
||||
procedure has not been analyzed yet.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The entire call-list is written to a file,
|
||||
to be processed by the second subphase.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The second subphase: making decisions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The task of the second subphase is quite easy
|
||||
to understand.
|
||||
It reads the call-list file,
|
||||
builds an incore call-list and deletes every
|
||||
call that may not be expanded in line (either because the called
|
||||
procedure may not be put in line, or because the actual parameters
|
||||
of the call do not match the formal parameters of the called procedure).
|
||||
It assigns a \fIpay-off\fR to every call,
|
||||
indicating how desirable it is to expand it.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The subphase repeatedly scans the call-list and takes
|
||||
the call with the highest ratio.
|
||||
The chosen one gets marked,
|
||||
and the call-list is extended with the nested calls,
|
||||
as described above.
|
||||
These nested calls are also assigned a ratio,
|
||||
and will be considered too during the next scans.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
After every decision the number of times
|
||||
every procedure is called is updated, using
|
||||
the call-count information.
|
||||
Meanwhile, the subphase keeps track of the amount of space left
|
||||
available.
|
||||
If all space is used, or if there are no more calls left to
|
||||
be expanded, it exits this loop.
|
||||
Finally, calls to procedures that are called only
|
||||
once are also chosen.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The actual parameters of a call are only needed by
|
||||
this subphase to assign a ratio to a call.
|
||||
To save some space, these actuals are not kept in main memory.
|
||||
They are removed after the call has been read and a ratio
|
||||
has been assigned to it.
|
||||
So this subphase works with \fIabstracts\fR of calls.
|
||||
After all work has been done,
|
||||
the actual parameters of the chosen calls are retrieved
|
||||
from a file,
|
||||
as they are needed by the transformation subphase.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The third subphase: doing transformations
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The third subphase makes the actual modifications to
|
||||
the EM text.
|
||||
It is directed by the decisions made in the previous subphase,
|
||||
as expressed via the call-list.
|
||||
The call-list read by this subphase contains
|
||||
only calls that were selected for expansion.
|
||||
The list is ordered in the same way as the EM text,
|
||||
i.e. if a call C1 appears before a call C2 in the call-list,
|
||||
C1 also appears before C2 in the EM text.
|
||||
So the EM text is traversed linearly,
|
||||
the calls that have to be substituted are determined
|
||||
and the modifications are made.
|
||||
If a procedure is come across that is no longer needed,
|
||||
it is simply not written to the output EM file.
|
||||
The substitution of a call takes place in distinct steps:
|
||||
.IP "change the calling sequence" 7
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The actual parameter expressions are changed.
|
||||
Parameters that are put in line are removed.
|
||||
All remaining ones must store their result in a
|
||||
temporary local variable, rather than
|
||||
push it on the stack.
|
||||
The CAL instruction and any ASP (to pop actual parameters)
|
||||
or LFR (to fetch the result of a function)
|
||||
are deleted.
|
||||
.IP "fetch the text of the called procedure"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
Direct disk access is used to to read the text of the
|
||||
called procedure.
|
||||
The file offset is obtained from the proctable entry.
|
||||
.IP "allocate bytes for locals and temporaries"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The local variables of the called procedure will be put in the
|
||||
stack frame of the calling procedure.
|
||||
The same applies to any temporary variables
|
||||
that hold the result of parameters
|
||||
that were not put in line.
|
||||
The proctable entry of the caller is updated.
|
||||
.IP "put a label after the CAL"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
If the called procedure contains a RET (return) instruction
|
||||
somewhere in the middle of its text (i.e. it does
|
||||
not fall through), the RET must be changed into
|
||||
a BRA (branch), to jump over the
|
||||
remainder of the text.
|
||||
This label is not needed if the called
|
||||
procedure falls through.
|
||||
.IP "copy the text of the called procedure and modify it"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
References to local variables of the called routine
|
||||
and to parameters that are not put in line
|
||||
are changed to refer to the
|
||||
new local of the caller.
|
||||
References to in line parameters are replaced
|
||||
by the actual parameter expression.
|
||||
Returns (RETs) are either deleted or
|
||||
replaced by a BRA.
|
||||
Messages containing information about local
|
||||
variables or parameters are changed.
|
||||
Global data declarations and the PRO and END pseudos
|
||||
are removed.
|
||||
Instruction labels and references to them are
|
||||
changed to make sure they do not have the
|
||||
same identifying number as
|
||||
labels in the calling procedure.
|
||||
.IP "insert the modified text"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The pseudos of the called procedure are put after the pseudos
|
||||
of the calling procedure.
|
||||
The real text of the callee is put at
|
||||
the place where the CAL was.
|
||||
.IP "take care of nested substitutions"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The expanded procedure may contain calls that
|
||||
have to be expanded too (nested calls).
|
||||
If the descriptor of this call contains actual
|
||||
parameter expressions,
|
||||
the code of the expressions has to be changed
|
||||
the same way as the code of the callee was changed.
|
||||
Next, the entire process of finding CALs and doing
|
||||
the substitutions is repeated recursively.
|
||||
.LP
|
|
@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files of IL
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of IL are in the following files
|
||||
and packages (the prefixes 1_, 2_ and 3_ refer to the three subphases):
|
||||
.IP il.h: 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and
|
||||
data structures
|
||||
.IP il.c:
|
||||
the routine main; the driving routines of the three subphases
|
||||
.IP 1_anal:
|
||||
contains a subroutine that analyzes a procedure
|
||||
.IP 1_cal:
|
||||
contains a subroutine that analyzes a call
|
||||
.IP 1_aux:
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 1
|
||||
.IP 2_aux:
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 2
|
||||
.IP 3_subst:
|
||||
the driving routine for doing the substitution
|
||||
.IP 3_change:
|
||||
lower level routines that do certain modifications
|
||||
.IP 3_aux:
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 3
|
||||
.IP aux:
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by several subphases.
|
||||
.LP
|
|
@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
|
|||
head
|
||||
intro1
|
||||
tail
|
|
@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.ND
|
||||
.\".ll 80m
|
||||
.\".nr LL 80m
|
||||
.\".nr tl 78m
|
||||
.tr ~
|
||||
.ds >. .
|
||||
.ds >, ,
|
||||
.ds [. " [
|
||||
.ds .] ]
|
||||
.cs 5 22
|
|
@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.TL
|
||||
The design and implementation of
|
||||
the EM Global Optimizer
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
H.E. Bal
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Wiskundig Seminarium, Amsterdam
|
||||
.AB
|
||||
The EM Global Optimizer is part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit,
|
||||
a toolkit for making retargetable compilers.
|
||||
It optimizes the intermediate code common to all compilers of
|
||||
the toolkit (EM),
|
||||
so it can be used for all programming languages and
|
||||
all processors supported by the kit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The optimizer is based on well-understood concepts like
|
||||
control flow analysis and data flow analysis.
|
||||
It performs the following optimizations:
|
||||
Inline Substitution, Strength Reduction, Common Subexpression Elimination,
|
||||
Stack Pollution, Cross Jumping, Branch Optimization, Copy Propagation,
|
||||
Constant Propagation, Dead Code Elimination and Register Allocation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This report describes the design of the optimizer and several
|
||||
of its implementation issues.
|
||||
.AE
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.FS
|
||||
This work was supported by the
|
||||
Stichting Technische Wetenschappen (STW)
|
||||
under grant VWI00.0001.
|
||||
.FE
|
||||
The EM Global Optimizer is part of a software toolkit
|
||||
for making production-quality retargetable compilers.
|
||||
This toolkit,
|
||||
called the Amsterdam Compiler Kit
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum toolkit rapport
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum toolkit cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
runs under the Unix*
|
||||
.FS
|
||||
*Unix is a Trademark of Bell Laboratories
|
||||
.FE
|
||||
operating system.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The main design philosophy of the toolkit is to use
|
||||
a language- and machine-independent
|
||||
intermediate code, called EM.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.]
|
||||
The basic compilation process can be split up into
|
||||
two parts.
|
||||
A language-specific front end translates the source program into EM.
|
||||
A machine-specific back end transforms EM to assembly code
|
||||
of the target machine.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The global optimizer is an optional phase of the
|
||||
compilation process, and can be used to obtain
|
||||
machine code of a higher quality.
|
||||
The optimizer transforms EM-code to better EM-code,
|
||||
so it comes between the front end and the back end.
|
||||
It can be used with any combination of languages
|
||||
and machines, as far as they are supported by
|
||||
the compiler kit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This report describes the design of the
|
||||
global optimizer and several of its
|
||||
implementation issues.
|
||||
Measurements can be found in.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
bal tanenbaum global
|
||||
.]
|
|
@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.SH
|
||||
Acknowledgements
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The author would like to thank Andy Tanenbaum for his guidance,
|
||||
Duk Bekema for implementing the Common Subexpression Elimination phase
|
||||
and writing the initial documentation of that phase,
|
||||
Dick Grune for reading the manuscript of this report
|
||||
and Ceriel Jacobs, Ed Keizer, Martin Kersten, Hans van Staveren
|
||||
and the members of the S.T.W. user's group for their
|
||||
interest and assistance.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
References
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.[
|
||||
$LIST$
|
||||
.]
|
|
@ -1 +0,0 @@
|
|||
lv1
|
|
@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
|
|||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Live-Variable analysis
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Live-Variable analysis" optimization technique (LV)
|
||||
performs some code improvements and computes information that may be
|
||||
used by subsequent optimizations.
|
||||
The main task of this phase is the
|
||||
computation of \fIlive-variable information\fR.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.] section 14.4]
|
||||
A variable A is said to be \fIdead\fR at some point p of the
|
||||
program text, if on no path in the control flow graph
|
||||
from p to a RET (return), A can be used before being changed;
|
||||
else A is said to be \fIlive\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A statement of the form
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
VARIABLE := EXPRESSION
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
is said to be dead if the left hand side variable is dead just after
|
||||
the statement and the right hand side expression has no
|
||||
side effects (i.e. it doesn't change any variable).
|
||||
Such a statement can be eliminated entirely.
|
||||
Dead code will seldom be present in the original program,
|
||||
but it may be the result of earlier optimizations,
|
||||
such as copy propagation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Live-variable information is passed to other phases via
|
||||
messages in the EM code.
|
||||
Live/dead messages are generated at points in the EM text where
|
||||
variables become dead or live.
|
||||
This information is especially useful for the Register
|
||||
Allocation phase.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The implementation uses algorithm 14.6 of.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.]
|
||||
First two sets DEF and USE are computed for every basic block b:
|
||||
.IP DEF(b) 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that are assigned a value in b before
|
||||
being used
|
||||
.IP USE(b) 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that may be used in b before being changed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
(So variables that may, but need not, be used resp. changed via a procedure
|
||||
call or through a pointer are included in USE but not in DEF).
|
||||
The next step is to compute the sets IN and OUT :
|
||||
.IP IN[b] 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that are live at the beginning of b
|
||||
.IP OUT[b] 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that are live at the end of b
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
IN and OUT can be computed for all blocks simultaneously by solving the
|
||||
data flow equations:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) IN[b] = OUT[b] - DEF[b] + USE[b]
|
||||
[2] OUT[b] = IN[s1] + ... + IN[sn] ;
|
||||
where SUCC[b] = {s1, ... , sn}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The equations are solved by a similar algorithm as for
|
||||
the Use Definition equations (see previous chapter).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Finally, each basic block is visited in turn to remove its dead code
|
||||
and to emit the live/dead messages.
|
||||
Every basic block b is traversed from its last
|
||||
instruction backwards to the beginning of b.
|
||||
Initially, all variables that are dead at the end
|
||||
of b are marked dead. All others are marked live.
|
||||
If we come across an assignment to a variable X that
|
||||
was marked live, a live-message is put after the
|
||||
assignment and X is marked dead;
|
||||
if X was marked dead, the assignment may be removed, provided that
|
||||
the right hand side expression contains no side effects.
|
||||
If we come across a use of a variable X that
|
||||
was marked dead, a dead-message is put after the
|
||||
use and X is marked live.
|
||||
So at any point, the mark of X tells whether X is
|
||||
live or dead immediately before that point.
|
||||
A message is also generated at the start of a basic block
|
||||
for every variable that was live at the end of the (textually)
|
||||
previous block, but dead at the entry of this block, or v.v.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Only local variables are considered.
|
||||
This significantly reduces the memory needed by this phase,
|
||||
eases the implementation and is hardly less efficient than
|
||||
considering all variables.
|
||||
(Note that it is very hard to prove that an assignment to
|
||||
a global variable is dead).
|
|
@ -1 +0,0 @@
|
|||
ov1
|
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show more
Loading…
Reference in a new issue